Home

HawkEye 1500 Series User`s Manual

1. Camera Host Camera Host 2 24 VDC 24 VDC Lo Input f Ve v DF 1 Input el NX 7 ST The maximum current that can pass through the optoisolators is 50 mA Non isolation setup can cause damage to the HawkEye 1500 if excessive voltage is applied to the optoisolators Sample wiring diagrams for strobe output TTL I O 1 in strobe mode are located on terminal block TB1 positions 12 and 13 GND see Figure 2 19 and Figure 2 20 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 2 23 Chapter Connecting to the HawkEye 1500 FIGURE 2 19 Equivalent Circuit of TTL IO 1 in Strobe Mode 45V 20 ma current limit strobe AAA Voh 4V 1 ioh 20 ma 10 ANA tvs filter FIGURE 2 20 External DIO TTL IO 1 Only Wiring in Strobe Mode Camera User Strobe Interface 5V 20 mA current limit V 2mA X 22K To Strobe input 20 mA max 4V Note Jumper JMP1 must be set to positions 1 and 2 to use the strobe output General Purpose I O Wiring Each Opto 22 module has two associated screw terminals Wire them according to the manufacturer s recommendations and your company s electrical standards Typically one side of all input modules connect to the hot power terminal with input
2. o Serial Connectivity Settings v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 6 7 Chapter ConsoleTTY Baud Rate The Bootloader 0 115200 Parity 0 Data Bits Stop Bits Flow Ctrl Or o System Settings EIP Enable 0 Load Job 1 Run Job 1 POST Flags 0x0000 Speaker 0 Advanced TCP IP Settings CP Lossy Heartbeat TCP Command 49095 49096 CP Lossless 49097 TCP PLC 49098 49094 Heartbeat Q 49093 SNTP Intval 0 SNTP Server Manufacturing Mode You may modify a single field directly via the Manufacturing Mode gt gt mbp tty Save parameters to flash 0 y n N Table 6 1 shows the parameter names for Manufacturing Mode TABLE 6 1 Parameter Name for Manufacturing Mode Description Mfg Name Parameters Network Name network ASCII string Use DHCP dhcp or 1 DHCP APIPA IP dhcpip Valid IP address DHCP APIPA Netmask dhcpmask Valid IP address DHCP Retry Timer dhcpretry Number of seconds before retrying DHCP IP Address ip Valid IP address 6 8 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Bootloader Menu TABLE 6 1 Parameter Name for Manufacturing Mode Continued Description Mfg Name Parameters Subnet Mask subnet Valid IP address Gate
3. deat Sunc 001000 0 00 00 e3 a0 a8 10 9 1b 00 0 00 11 44 00 10 001000f0 0 Od 1 a0 d9 9 2 bO 04 2 4c 70 01 el a0 Tournee Seles m Modify Memory The m command allows you to poke register values The contents of the specified address are displayed waiting for user input in hex format The next 660 register location is automatically displayed Type q to quit Syntax gt gt m address width 6 gt m 0x100000 00100000 0003 3 00100002 e152 q i o 2 dt Display Test Menu The dt command displays the Diagnostic Test Menu 9 Syntax dt v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 6 5 Chapter The Bootloader et Execute Test The et command executes a specified test allowing you to optionally enter a count for the number of times the test is to be executed Syntax gt gt et test loopCnt dbp Display Boot Parameters The dbp command displays the current boot parameter settings Syntax gt gt dbp TCP IP Connectivity Settings Default network name slot_009 Use DHCP 1 DHCP APIPA IP 169 254 0 0 DHCP APIPA Netmask 255 255 0 0 DHCP Retry Timer 300 Static IP 192 168 254 3 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 Domain Name acut com Enable UDP Announce 0 Address 00 60 33 e0 01 01 Serial Connectivity Settings Console TTY 2 Baud Rat
4. 3 32 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Formatted Output amp Audio TABLE 3 6 Report Error Codes Continued Error Number Error Description 4715 ISO Verification failed RDA STEP F 2 4716 ISO Verification failed RDA STEP F 3 4717 ISO Verification failed RDA STEP A E 4718 ISO Verification failed final image adjustment 4719 ISO Verification failed RDA error correction 3 4720 ISO Verification DM row column too large 4721 ISO Verification cell smaller than Min x gt 4722 ISO Verification cell larger than Max 2 6001 QR Code general error 6002 Code ratio error Xo 6003 QR Code finder error 9 6004 QR Code line fit error m 6005 QR Code line intersect error ro 6006 QR Code corner error 6007 QR Code boundary error 6008 QR Code length ratio error 6020 QR Code decode unknown error 6021 QR Code rs level invalid 6022 QR Code format info failed 6023 QR Code version info failed 6024 QR Code rows cols invalid 6025 QR Code data codewrd invalid 6026 QR Code total codeword invalid 6027 QR Code mode indicator invalid 6028 QR Code mode unimplemented 6029 QR Code rs decode failed 6030 QR Code BCH15 5 undecodable 6031 QR Code model invalid 6032 QR Code timeout error 6100 QR Code design unimplemented 6101 NO UID ENABLE
5. tc tc This lOMode requires the definition of the following lines to work correctly 10 Assignment Apply OK 3 Select Use Trigger on OPTO IN 1 4 Fromthe Triggering Edge pull down menu select one of the following triggering edges v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 53 Chapter ReadRunner Low to High Highto Low Both 5 Click Apply 6 Click OK Advanced I O To specify the I O behavior mode 1 Press Ctrl F6 or select Settings from the Settings menu 2 Click Yes when asked if you wish to control camera X ReadRunner displays the IO Settings window as shown in Figure 4 42 4 54 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner FIGURE 4 42 I O Settings Window Modes Displayed Trigger Use Trigger on OPTO IN 1 10 Behavior Mode Disabled m Pass Fail Only Ful Handshake Pass Fail Only Pipelined Data Valid Full Handshake Data Valid Pipelined 10 Assignment 0 2 Line Verify Full HS DY 3 Line Verify Full HS DV 2 Line Verify Pulse DY 3 Line Verity Pulse This 1OMod the following lines to work correctly tc tc 10 Assignment Cancel Apply 3 From the IO Behavior Mode pull down menu select one of the following Disabled Pass Fail Only Full Handshake Handshake mo
6. For details about how to use this capability please consult the Technical Note titled Tech Note EM 40176 1 5 o a tc v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 5 5 Chapter Reading Difficult Symbols 5 6 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 camere he Bootloader This chapter describes the diagnostics and utilities for the HawkEye 1500 Diagnostic Levels HawkEye 1500 diagnostics can be divided into the following levels of testing Level 0 diagnostics are executed as a power on self test from the boot loader and provide enough coverage to safely bring up the application code e Level 1 diagnostics are executed as part of the vx Works application initialization scheme Examples of tests running at this level are those that require the FPGA to be loaded or those that need system services such as timers O In addition to these levels an enhanced diagnostic monitor is provided for hardware debug and verification The diagnostic monitor represents a significant enhancement of the existing terminal program and is resident within the bootloader The monitor provides utilities and tests to aid in hardware debug and verification o o Diagnostic Monitor Tests typically consisting of hardware functional blocks can be run one at a time or as part of a group Through the use of a loop counter the
7. Match List may be used in conjunction with serial number sequence matching If discrete output is required 1 only one line set in the result use only match strings 1 2 4 and 8 Use of other match strings will result in more than one output bit being set in the result For example if match string 7 binary 0111 is matched MATCH BIT 1 MATCH BIT 2 and MATCH BIT 3 will be set i tc tc Note The Match List does not require image re acquisition or re decode using different PID settings so it is much more efficient than other methods of determining which string is a match The HawkEye firmware supports a JOB based MATCH LIST which will contain up to 15 string expressions The integer index of the string expression in the MATCH LIST will correspond to a binary mask that will be applied to the Digital I O lines of the camera At run time following a decode the application will operate as follows e Ifthe MATCH LIST is enabled the application will search the non empty entries in the MATCH LIST from index 1 to index 15 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 31 Chapter ReadRunner When the first match between the decoded string and the string expression in the MATCH LIST is encountered the Digital I O lines will be set in the bit pattern defined by the binary value of the index into the MATCH LIST e Once a match has been found the application
8. 50 80mm e al 38mr mai aW t me i DIA BY 0 085 DEEP 2 PLACES PLACE FIGURE E 5 HEBMA 2 Optional Mounting Block for HawkEye 1525 19 05mm 1 750 Tomi Cr mim VIT iod pa rid dui 5 np org Hw fn 2540mm 1 00 50 80mm 2 00 19 05mm 750 9 53mm 9 53mm 375 375 A 9 53mm 4 595 1 375 15 11mm S Peet gt 85 15 11 i 595 e Qi e 9 53mm 375 gt 0 125 DIA THRU CB 0 225 BY 0 210 DP 2 PLACES 8 32 THRU 4 PLACES 9 128 THRU 4 PLACES TAP 6MM THRU 2 PLACES 1 4 20 THRU 3 PLACES oc c D G D B B C 6 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Dimensions FIGURE E 6 HEBMA 3 Mounting Block Adapter HE 10 to HE 1510 2 00 TTT i TTT pu 12 70 500 11 53 450 2X 1 4 20 THRU 17 15mm 675 2X 00 125 THRU __ j 100 225 0 510 i N 25 40mm 8 4 12 70mm 1 00 r 50 6 35mm 38 10mm 250 1 500 9
9. does not 0 lt time between triggers lt acq FIGURE 3 3 Trigger Diagram 3 TI k y Td gt Latch l Time Acq Acq start end 3 14 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 I O Operations Trigger Diagram 4 This example illustrates how triggers are rejected when the latch time is greater than the time between triggers Because T gt time between triggers and Taeq lt Tj effectively lt time between triggers so there is no trigger overrun does not 0 gt time between triggers Te acq FIGURE 3 4 Trigger Diagram Trigger 15 2 T oz me x2 Go rw Latch end Time Acq Acq start end v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 3 15 Chapter HawkEye 1500 Series Overview Trigger Diagram 5 This example produces no trigger overrun Because T time between triggers and T lt T the acquisition cycle has time to complete before the next trigger The diagram also illustrates how multiple triggers are pending in the trigger queue Tg time between triggers T lt time between triggers T lt Ti acq FIGURE 3 5 Trigger Diagram Trigger Latch Acq Acq Time end start end 3 16 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov
10. v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 127 Chapter ReadRunner Save Images as Bitmap Specifies that QueueView should save images onto the PC as bmp files Save Images as TIFFs Specifies that QueueView should save images onto the PC as tif files This is the default Verify If this report contains verification results then this button activates a verification report display 2 From the List of Cameras pull down menu select a camera 3 Click Upload Part Queue clear from camera QueueView loads the entire Part Queue Saving Images to the PC Using QueueView To save images to the PC using QueueView 1 Click either Save Images as Bitmap or Save Images as TIFFs 2 Select Select Image Folder a Save Current Image Save All Images Select Image Folder QueueView displays a screen similar to the following FIGURE 4 84 Select Folder Window i Select Folder x OK C 3com 231386 Program Files C psp CJ stb128nt GI TEMP CJ Windows Update Setup Files CJ WINNT 4 128 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Fine Tuning amp Monitoring Your Application 3 Specify where you want to save the images Click OK 4 Click either Save Current Image or Save All Images QueueView saves the image s to the specified location on the PC The file names of the saved images have the following f
11. 2 PWR Ethernet LED 1 Table 2 20 describes the rear panel power and Ethernet LEDs QuicSet TABLE 2 20 Rear Panel Power amp Ethernet LEDs Name Color Description PWR Green Power on LED LK Green Ethernet Link LED ACT Yellow Ethernet Activity LED 2 42 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Mode Status LEDs Table 2 21 describes the Ethernet link LEDs TABLE 2 21 Ethernet Link LEDs N LK LED Green ACT LED Yellow Description Solid Solid 100 BaseT Full Duplex 8 Solid Flashing 100 BaseT Half Duplex or Flashing Solid 10 BaseT Full Duplex Flashing Flashing 10 BaseT Half Duplex m 2 x oS lt Mode Status LEDs Figure 2 41 shows the rear panel mode and status LEDs FIGURE 2 41 Mode Status LEDs Trig LED Pass LED Fail LED Pass Mode LED O Fail Mode Table 2 22 describes the mode and status LEDs TABLE 2 22 Mode Status LEDs Description LED Color Trig Trigger LED Yellow Pass Pass LED Green Fail Fail LED Red Mode Mode LED Yellow v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 2 43 Chapter Connecting to the HawkEye 1500 Verification LEDs Table 2 23 shows the state of the LEDs when Verification is on TABLE 2 23 LEDs When Verification Is On Pass LED Fail LED
12. D Carriage Return CR v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 3 31 Chapter HawkEye 1500 Series Overview You can also use keywords to expand specific pieces of data within the output string These keywords include ANGLE CHECKSUM DATA DATAHEX DETAILED PIDZ TIMESTAMP VERI 1 IAQG VERI AIMDPM VERI DETAIL VERI FORMATTED VERI GRADE VERI STATUS ONLY and WITH INFO For detailed information about these keywords see Format String Keywords on page 4 77 Reported Error Codes Table 3 6 contains possible error codes TABLE 3 6 Report Error Codes Error Number Error Description 0 Decode Successful 3048 Unable to decode 4601 No edge candidate found 4604 First edge not found 4605 Second edge not found 4611 Third edge not found 4612 Fourth edge not found 4620 Four corners not found 4621 Size varying too much 4622 Row Column test failed 4630 Inspection timeout 4633 Border match test failed 4650 Verification contrast calibration failure 4651 Verification cellunit calibration failure 4700 Verification process error 4701 Verification unsupported 4702 Verification timeout 4710 ISO Verification ECC200 required 4711 ISO Verification aperture too small 4712 ISO Verification aperture too large 4713 ISO Verification insufficient space 4714 ISO Verification failed RDA STEP F 1
13. Static IP Address serge_hel515 uidhd152566nm workingagain sqal500_ija op4 djhawkeye1500 hawkeye 01 01 IP Address m 5 Enter the IP address of the camera and click OK Using Live Video to Align the Camera After adding and controlling a camera you must align and adjust its position To align the camera 1 Placeasymbol in the camera s field of view 2 Click u Turbo Live to begin aligning and adjusting the camera Note Clicking Turbo Live does not turn on the laser The camera stops decoding and increases the rate at which it takes pictures which helps you to align and adjust the camera position The camera should be correctly aligned and adjusted when the two laser dots are close together on the symbol 4 12 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Setting Up Your Application Note The point where the laser dots converge is when the camera is at near focus See Figure 4 8 Moving the camera away from the symbol slightly will improve the focus Remember to keep the 20 tilt angle HawkEye 1515 to the symbol surface to eliminate reflections DO NOT LOOK AT THE LASER WHEN READING PARTS THAT ARE HIGHLY REFLECTIVE BE CAREFUL THAT THE LASER IS REFLECTED INTO SOMEONP S EYE n FIGURE 4 8 Laser Targeting p I 1 1 I 1 Y 1 Vi NEAR FOCUS LIMIT ln Ii TORIS PLANE s EM A FA
14. UCC 128 PDF417 TL T T D FAI D 12 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Creating a Data Matrix 2 From the pull down menu under Step 2 select Data Matrix 3 Click Next Step You will see a screen similar to the one displayed in Figure D 8 FIGURE D 8 Creating a Data Matrix MICROSCAN Precision Data Acquisition I li um 53 a PE e and Control Solutions Industry Solutions Service amp Support Bes MM lt lt Back to choose a different code type Create Bar Codes Data to encode x Bar Height CM show detailed options Generate Bar Code Site Map Email Us Privacy Statement 800 762 1149 o c o A oc gt 92 2 Q gt o 4 Enter the data to encode 5 Click Generate Bar Code For more information about label printing software packages direct part marking technologies that apply Data Matrix marks on actual parts and or other solutions to your specific Data Matrix encoding marking needs please contact your Microscan distribution partner account manager or applications engineer Reader Programming Data Matrix By placing a Reader Programming Data Matrix under the field of view and depressing the QuicSet button once the code will be read once then the QuicSet mode will automatically exit and return to the operational mode with the changes applied by your Reader Programming Data
15. Index Mode LEDs 2 43 Modes demo 3 3 4 47 i o behavior 4 54 lighting 3 4 motion 3 4 4 47 presentation 3 4 specifying retry 4 50 stop and scan 3 4 4 48 supermarket 3 4 4 48 Modify boot parameters command 6 7 memory command 6 5 Modules input 2 26 output 2 26 Motion Mode 3 4 4 47 Mounting Blocks 2 47 N Name network overview window 4 97 Names unique camera 3 3 Network Overview Window 4 96 alarms 4 97 connections 4 97 controller 4 97 cycles 4 97 failed 4 97 Ip address 4 97 name 4 97 passed 4 97 status 4 97 SW Version 4 98 No quiet zone clutter 4 116 NOMINAL DEV 4 61 Num barcodes 4 110 cols 4 103 columns 4 105 datamatrix 4 105 rows 4 103 4 106 amp external 4 49 with power strobe 3 5 4 49 On PowerStrb Ext 4 49 OPEN Method 4 25 Optional check sum checking 4 117 4 118 4 119 remove cs display 4 117 4 118 4 119 Orientation 4 106 Output format strings specifying 4 71 formatted 3 31 opto wiring 2 21 2 31 upc as ean 4 120 Overall 4 16 OVHD D 5 P Parameters displaying barcode 4 109 data matrix 4 104 save on camera 4 89 Parity 4 66 4 67 Part Queue 4 16 configuring 4 120 on off 4 121 saving images from 4 126 uploading images to 4 126 viewing images from 4 126 PartQ 4 16 Pass Color 4 46 Pass Fail Only full handshake 3 19 3 24 4 55 pipelined 3 19 3 21 4 55 Passed network overview window 4 97 Photo 4 16 Photometry auto 4 22 automatic 4 22 manual 4 22 Physical Triggers
16. v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 3 33 Chapter HawkEye 1500 Series Overview TABLE 3 6 Report Error Codes Continued Error Number Error Description 6102 HEADER 1ST POSITION ERROR 6103 HEADER 2RD POSITION ERROR 6104 HEADER 3RD POSITION ERROR 6105 HEADER 4TH POSITION ERROR 6106 HEADER GS ERROR 6107 FORMAT INDICATOR ERROR 6108 TRAILER RS ERROR 6109 TRAILER EOT ERROR 6110 DOUBLE TRAILER ERROR 6111 DATA ELEMENT SEPARATOR ERROR 6140 SOFTWARE ERROR 1 6190 DATA QUALIFIER SPACE 6192 TEI DATA QUALIFIER 6194 TEI SPACE ERROR 6195 WRONG FORMAT INDICATOR 6200 DATA QUALIFIER ERROR 6201 NEED UII ELEMENT FIRST 6202 NO UII ELEMENT ERROR 6203 ELEMENT INCOMPLETE 6204 DATA ELEMENT CHARACTER 6205 LOWER CASE CHARACTER 6206 DATA ELEMENT TOO SHORT 6207 DATA ELEMENT TOO LONG 6208 ENTERPRISE NUM TOO LONG 6209 ORIGINAL PARTNUM TOO LONG 6210 SERIAL NUM TOO LONG ERROR 6211 REQUEST ELEMENT NUM ERROR 6212 UII TOO LONG 6213 SOFTWARE ERROR 2 6301 PNR TOO LONG 6302 PNR TOO SHORT 3 34 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 QuicSet Symbol Photometry TABLE 3 6 Report Error Codes Continued Error Number Error Description 6303 PNR CHARACTER ERROR 6311 TOO L
17. v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 29 Chapter ReadRunner FIGURE 4 22 Text Matching Window Mode Setup x r Text Matching Match Sting r Serial Number Matching Enable Serial Number Matching 3 Enter the exact text case sensitive you want to match Note You can use the and wildcards in the match string definition The Match String should contain only printable characters 4 Click Apply and OK Graphically in the image area ReadRunner will display either of the following messages Fora successful match Code Matched Foran unsuccessful match NO MATCH Error After text matching is enabled your Camera Report window will look similar to the one displayed in Figure 4 23 4 30 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner FIGURE 4 23 ReadRunner Camera Report Window Cycles 194 133 61 Decodes 194 0 Located 134 0 Text Matching enabled Matches 133 B1 Match List Triggered I O Match List Triggered IO allows you to match the decoded string against up to 15 match strings expressions containing optional single and multiple character wildcards The resulting MATCH INDEX is the index into the list of strings where the match was found The MATCH INDEX can be reported in text reports and as the 4 bit binary equivalent through the assignment of MATCH BIT n keywords to the IO lines
18. BOOL GPIO OUT1 4 v HighTue MATCH Bir 1 v BOOL j GPIO OUT2 High True MATCH BIT 2 BOOL QUT3 E tc High True MATCH 3 BOOL 5 GPIO 00 4 High True The MATCH BIT 1 through MATCH BIT 4 keywords are available only when connected to a HawkEye camera running firmware newer than the released version of 2 1 Keyword assignments are performed with the following commands IOASSIGN OUT1 PASS IOASSIGN OPTO OUT2 FAIL IOASSIGN OPTO OUT3 DV IOASSIGN GPIO 00 1 MATCH BIT 1 IOASSIGN GPIO OUT2 MATCH BIT 2 IOASSIGN GPIO OUT3 MATCH BIT 3 IOASSIGN GPIO_OUT4 MATCH BIT 4 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 33 Chapter ReadRunner FIGURE 4 25 Enable Text Matching Screen r Text Matching EnableText Matching r Serial Number Matching Enable Serial Number Matching The MatchList options will only be displayed for HawkEye cameras running firmware newer than the released version of 2 1 4 34 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner FIGURE 4 26 Enable MatchList Mode Setup Text Matching EnableText Matching Match String Enable MatchList In Serial Number Matching Enable Serial Number Matching After you select Enable Text Matching ReadRunner gives you the opti
19. C Parameters Output UPC EAN OFF Undo Auto Learn Auto Learn Parameters v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 119 o c gt tc tc Chapter ReadRunner Output UPC as EAN Specifies whether or not UPC data is displayed as EAN Debugging Images Configuring the Part Queue The Part Queue saves the result data to a file path local or remote You can configure the camera to save the data when it occurs rather than in memory or save the data on demand with a command The records are stored as a re usable queue that is when the queue is full the newest record replaces the oldest record Part Queue is loss less it will store a record for every image it sees Note The Part Queue uses the default ASCII Command port which is port 49095 Telnet which by default communicates on port 23 provides a connection to the Camera s low level Monitor Shell for diagnostics purposes only A special Shell command is available in this environment for sending HE15xx commands to the Camera via Telnet The command has the following format lt 15 Reader ASCII Command String gt To configure the Part Queue 1 Press Ctrl U or select Configure Part Queue from the Settings menu 2 Click Yes when asked if you wish to control camera X ReadRunner displays the Configure Part Queue window as shown in Figure 4 81 4 120 HawkEye 1
20. Fail state and asserts DV after 2ms setup time 3 User accepts the Good Fair Poor Fail state result and then negates TRIG 4 Reader detects TRIG negated and then negates DV TABLE 3 3 Three Line Multiplex of Verification Results Line Keyword Name State Good Fair Poor Good On Off Off Fair Off On Off Poor Off Off On Fail Off Off Off v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 3 27 Chapter HawkEye 1500 Series Overview DV 2 Line Verify Pulse Trigger Acquire Decode Present Good Poor DV The Data Valid Pipelined Mode drives the Good and Poor lines when the results of the verification are completed see Table 3 4 for the line states of Good Fair Poor and Fail This mode then drives the Data Valid line for the pre determined duration to indicate that the level on the Good and Poor lines is valid The line will be set to the polarity for an indicated duration You can configure the duration of the signal by using the IO MODE command FIGURE 3 13 DV 2 Line Verify Pulse assert negate time time Notes 1 User asserts Trigger user can re trigger after acquisition is complete 2 When read is complete reader sets the Good Fair Poor Fail state and asserts DV after 2 ms set up time 3 Reader negates DV after user programmed signal duration time new decode can start 3 28 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4
21. For additional information about Retry Modes see Retry Modes on page 3 6 Extended PID List The PID List and PID List w Acquire retry modes allow up to 15 PIDs with specific decoder settings to be tried The additional PID list entry slots become visible in the user interface as they are populated A value of 0 at any point terminates the list Note The camera is sent the entire defined list but will only process retries on PIDs up to the point that it sees the first 0 in the list There are two modes of retry list operation e PID List A single image acquisition is performed and decodes attempted using the settings for each PID in the list always starting at the first and working through to the end ofthe list For performance reasons it is important to order the list in terms of diminishing probability of decode success so that the chance of decode on the first one or two PIDs will be optimized Subsequent reads proceed from the list position that the last read finished on c 3 oc tc PID List w Acquire Cycles through the PID list taking new images until a successful Acquire Decode pair happens Both modes have process specific considerations that need to be taken into account before choosing which mode best suits a specific application For example if the resulting Data Valid line controls when to move a conveyor belt to advance to the next part you would n
22. ReadRunner Buttons Just below the menu bar are two buttons TABLE 4 2 Unique Camera Names Add Camera This button connects the camera you specify and adds a button containing the name of the newly added camera This shortcut makes it easy for you to move from one camera to another At boot time if a camera s network name is HawkEye the camera automatically changes HawkEye to HawkEyexxyyzz where xxyyzz is the last three fields of the camera s MAC address For example o c me tc tc Camera Name at Unique Camera Boot Time MAC Address Name HawkEye 00 60 33 60 00 1 1 HawkEyeE0001 1 HawkEye 00 60 33 0 00 12 HawkEyeE00012 HawkEye 00 60 33 0 00 13 HawkEyeE00013 HawkEye 00 60 33 0 00 14 HawkEyeE00014 HawkEye 00 60 33 0 00 15 HawkEyeE00015 Take Control This button denies other users access to a camera while you set it up and specify parameters for a job After you take control of a camera the Take Control button becomes the Release button By default these two buttons appear on the main ReadRunner window v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 5 Chapter ReadRunner Table 4 3 contains descriptions of other buttons that are common to ReadRunner TABLE 4 3 ReadRunner Buttons Button Description gt This is the Add Camera button Click it to display a list of cameras that are
23. When a client takes control it essentially has a private connection to the camera and results are not sent to other clients For more information see Chapter 4 ReadRunner Note Use this device as specified by Microscan 3 2 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Unique Camera Names Unique Camera Names At boot time if a camera s network name is HawkEye the camera s software automatically changes HawkEye to HawkEyexxyyzz where xxyyzz is the last three fields of the camera s MAC address For example TABLE 3 1 Unique Camera Names Camera Name at Unique Camera Boot Time MAC Address Name HawkEye 00 60 33 60 00 1 1 HawkEyeE0001 1 HawkEye 00 60 33 0 00 12 HawkEyeE00012 HawkEye 00 60 33 0 00 13 HawkEyeE00013 HawkEye 00 60 33 0 00 14 HawkEyeE00014 HawkEye 00 60 33 0 00 15 HawkEyeE00015 Application Modes To integrate the HawkEye 1500 with various scanning applications one may need to change its operating parameters As an aid to configuring the HawkEye 1500 ReadRunner has an Application Mode display available to you This display contains four choices that generalize typical use for the HawkEye 1500 From the selection chosen a number of pre defined parameter selections are made You may override any of these selections at any time The four general application modes are Demo Demo Stop and Scan Motion Supermarket Demo mod
24. modem 7 Sew Xmodem transfers the file to the camera s memory as shown in Figure 2 FIGURE C 2 Xmodem File Send Window Xmodem file send for Scott CENE When complete the bootloader menu is re displayed 9 When complete press J to jump to the camera application C 4 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using HawkEye Flasher Using HawkEye Flasher The HawkEye Flasher is a simple application you use to upgrade your camera s software It allows you to select a camera a Registry file a Bootloader file and or a vx Works kernel file then update the camera accordingly FIGURE C 3 Flasher Window HawkEye Flasher 3 5 x dihawkeyet 500 10 2 1 250 Update Load vx Works Kernel File f Program Files ReadRunner Camera Binariessvs orks bin Advanced lt lt Eo Oc ET 9 5 Load Registry File m unen Files ReadRunnersCamera Binaries registry bin Load Bootloader File m Files ReadRunnersCamera Binariessbootloader bin v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual C 5 Appendix Kel Upgrading Camera Software The cameras that are detected on the local network are listed in the Camera box along with COMI and COM2 You can flash cameras on a separate subnet by selecting Static IP Address in the Camera drop down window a
25. o v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual E 7 Appendix Specifications FIGURE 7 HEBMA 4 Mounting Block Adapter HE 15 to HE 1515 2 00 wu ET NE dd 12 70mm 6 35mm 500 2x 1 4 20 THRU 4 18 42mm 250 EN 725 2X 90 125 THRU 00 225 X 0 560 i 25 40 E um 1 12 70mm 1 00 uad 50 1 6 35mm 38 10mm 25 1 500 FIGURE E 8 External I O terminal Block Dimensions 52 1mm 66 0mm 2 05 2 60 1 y 20020200020 a E 35565686 92 7 3 65 fie 8 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Dimensions FIGURE E 9 I O Expansion Module Dimensions 97 2mm 3 83 125 7mm 4 95 n n 9 o v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual E 9 Appendix Specifications E 10 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008
26. A Boolean that is either ON or OFF This is the default behavior for PASS FAIL DV RTE GOOD FAIR POOR and DECODE FAILURE keyword names o c c gt oc tc e MASK A bit mask is AND ed to the keyword name s value If the result is 0 then the line is turned OFF Otherwise the line is turned ON This is the default behavior for the LOCATE FAILURE NOMINAL DEV Ifthe keyword name s value is within the range of a nominal value plus or minus a deviation value the line is turned OFF Otherwise the line is turned ON This is the default behavior for ANGLE FAILURE v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 61 Chapter ReadRunner FIGURE 4 45 I O Assignment Window NOMINAL DEV Behavior fd djhawkeye1500 CTRL 10 Assignment X IN1 Delay Latch PD 0 gt o o OUTI1 High True Pass DOUT2 High True FAIL JBOOL OUT3 High True amp PIO OUTI High True GPIO OUT2 Nominal Dev High True NOMINAL DEV 0 fis GPIO_OUT3 v High True RTE JBOOL GPIO 0074 High True When used with the ANGLE FAIL NOMINAL DEV behavior of 0 through 359 1 that there is an ANG understands that angles ar The example in Figure 4 45 will consider the in th UR
27. D zo L d Ox c 6 5 or Output Opto Wiring Sample wiring diagrams for PASS FAIL and DATA VALID outputs opto outputs 1 2 and 3 are located on terminal block see Figure 2 16 and Figure 2 17 e PASS opto output 1 Positions 6 and 7 FAIL opto output 2 Positions 8 and 9 e DATA VALID opto output 3 Positions 10 and 11 The assignment of PASS FAIL AND DATA VALID to these lines is the default factory setting In V2 0 other outputs can be configured to come out on the OPTO OUTI OPTO OUT2 and OPTO OUT3 lines v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 2 21 Chapter Connecting to the HawkEye 1500 FIGURE 2 16 Output Opto Wiring Isolated Input Camera Host 50V Input OR Host 50V Input FIGURE 2 17 Output Opto Wiring Isolated Relay and PLC Inputs Camera Relay 50V ITT a Camera PLC lt 50V PLC Input vei E GND Figure 2 18 shows the output opto wiring for non isolated inputs 2 22 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 I O Expansion Module Optional FIGURE 2 18 Output Opto Wiring Non Isolated Inputs
28. Data 9876543210999 D 15 EAN 8 Data 76543210 D 15 UPC A Data 98765432109 D 16 5 Digit Postnet with Check Character Data 020215 D 16 SEMI BC412 with Both Start Stop amp Checksum 0 16 Pharmacode Data 399 0 16 APPENDIX E Specifications 1 HawkEye 1500 Dimensions 2 APPENDIX F Custom Programming Using a Serial Connection F 1 Code Walkthrough F 2 Complete Source Code F 4 Index Index 1 xiv HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Preface PREFACE Welcome Purpose of This Manual This manual is designed to help you to understand how your HawkEye 1500 works and how to use it quickly and efficiently Manual Conventions The following typographical conventions are used throughout this manual e tems emphasizing important information is bolded e Menu selections menu items and entries in screen images are indicated as Run triggered Modify etc v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual XV Preface xvi HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 m o c 5 5 5 D c CHAPTER 1 Configurations This chapter contains information about selecting the proper HawkEye 1500 Series Smart Camera Based Reader for your application It also contains information about selecting lenses and lighting Note Throughout this manual HawkEye 1500 Series Camera is used as a generic term for the
29. Pinout Signal Distribution Terminal Block Continued 12 Opto Output 1 B 13 Opto Output 2 B 14 Opto Output 3 B 15 I O Return Ground Field I O Wiring Examples Input Opto Wiring Sample wiring diagrams for trigger inputs A and B opto inputs are located on terminal block TB1 positions 1 and 11 see Figure 2 25 and Figure 2 26 FIGURE 2 25 Input Opto Wiring Isolated NPN and PNP Sources NPN Source Camera PNP Source Camera Vcc 5 24V 5 24V 1 Signal E LH V Signal igna E A FIGURE 2 26 Input Opto Wiring Non Isolated NPN and PNP Sources NPN Source Camera PNP Source Camera 24 VDC Voc ee Signal 1 m gas gt x hH E Signal d he 2 30 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 External I O Terminal Block Adapter Optional Output Opto Wiring Sample wiring diagrams for PASS FAIL and DATA VALID outputs opto outputs 1 2 and 3 are located on terminal block TBI see Figure 2 27 Figure 2 28 and Figure 2 29 N PASS opto output 1 Positions 2 and 12 FAIL opto output 2 Positions 3 and 13 e DATA VALID opto output 3 Positions 4 and 14 The assig
30. Reset Unit 6 13 Syntax 6 13 j Jump to Application 6 13 Syntax 6 13 e Display Last Logged Error 6 13 Syntax 6 13 h Display Command Help 6 13 Syntax 6 13 Diagnostic Test Menu 6 13 LEDS 6 15 Power on Sequence 6 15 Error Codes 6 15 HawkEye 1510 1 Optics 2 External Lighting Mounting Options 3 Power for Lights 6 Options A 6 Lighting Connector A 7 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual xi Contents APPENDIX B Troubleshooting amp Frequently Asked Questions 1 Frequently Asked Questions 1 My camera is connected to the network and serial port but have no idea what the current communication settings are How do figure it B 1 have DHCP activated but the camera reports a 169 254 x x address What s happening B 2 How can tell if the IP configuration of my PC and my camera are valid B 3 How do restore the camera to factory defaults B 3 When should use DHCP B 3 have no idea what the current settings are for the camera What do do B 4 What if Learn succeeds but read fails B 4 My decode data is very long Is there a way to disable the sending of this data on the serial port 4 A connection has taken control of my camera and can t regain control Is there a way to break this control so can get it back 5 When disconnect the network cable from the PC while the camera is under control by ReadRunner reconnecting the network cable will not allow Re
31. Serial Connector amp Serial Adapter Cable Serial Connector amp Serial Adapter Cable Figure 2 37 shows the pinout for the mini DIN 8 serial cable 2 FIGURE 2 37 Serial Connector mini DIN 8 1 on ic 8 7 6 OE 5 4 3 o o oO or 3p 420 Jr Table 2 17 lists the suppliers for the mini DIN 8 mating connector TABLE 2 17 mini DIN 8 Mating Connector Suppliers Supplier Part Number KDMLA X 8P G30 Mini DIN Plug 8 Position Snap and Lock Kit Figure 2 38 shows the wiring for the HESC 006 serial adapter cable v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 2 39 Chapter Connecting to the HawkEye 1500 FIGURE 2 38 HESC 006 Serial Adapter Cable _ CABLE SHIELD DB 9F 4 d eo 4 NC 6 22 __ NC 9 oa GRAY GRAY oO _ HOST CPU lt 2 BLUE BLUE 2 z 5 YELLOW YELLOW 8 5 6 RED RED 7 INC BROWN NC 1 e CONNECT SHIELD TO CONNECTOR SHELL WIRE 28AWG 72 INCHES 8 00 4 INCHES OVER MOLD d mmi ES KDMLA 8P FAIR RITE a KYCON MINI DIN 8 2643540002 CONN DETAIL CONN DETAIL P RN V Bo 2 6 50 44 3 61 1 DB 9F PIN OUT SOLDER SI
32. TTL I O 1 in strobe mode are located on terminal block positions 5 and 15 GND see Figure 2 30 and Figure 2 31 2 FIGURE 2 30 Equivalent Circuit of TTL IO 1 in Strobe Mode Do to LO 45V 9 Tm gt 20 ma current limit r strobe ANN P Voh 4V m NC ioh 20 ma Ov 10 gt ANN gt 2 QI lt tvs gt 22K filter Figure 2 31 shows the equivalent DIO wiring in strobe mode FIGURE 2 31 External DIO TTI IO 1 Only Wiring in Strobe Mode Camera User Strobe Interface 5V 20 mA current limit i m 2mA 22K To Strobe input 20 mA max 4V Sample wiring diagrams for external TTL I O including TTL I O 1 in I O mode are located on the terminal block TTL I O 1 Position 5 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 2 33 Chapter Connecting to the HawkEye 1500 e TTL I O 2 Position 7 e TTL I O 3 Position 8 TTLI O 4 Position 9 See Figure 2 32 and Figure 2 33 FIGURE 2 32 Equiv Circuit of TTL I Os including TTL IO 1 in I O Mode 45V Vol 0 55V max lt 2 2K 102 3 4 iol 24 gt 3 2K 101 our BP 10 EE ANN m IN Vih 2V min filter Vil 1V max Vhyst 1V FIGURE 2 33 External DIO Wiring in I O Mode Camera User TTL Interface 5V m H l 2 2K To TTL input or output 20 mA
33. amp 27 Case Else MsgBox Invalid Compression Ratio End Select cmd amp 255 cmd 1 cmd amp 4 cmd amp 26 If m bHookImages Then cmd cmd amp 1 Else cmd cmd amp 0 End If send the REPORTREQ m connection CommandSend cmd End If HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Tndex Symbols SEC Files C 1 bootloader_Reader sec C 2 registry Reader sec C 2 vxWorks Readersec C 2 V 4 98 Numerics 8 bit Binary Code D 4 A About ReadRunner 4 98 Acquisition use camera for 4 130 Adapter external i o terminal block 2 27 Add camera 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 11 Adding camera 4 7 not in network overview 4 11 on a different subnet 4 11 Advanced Tuning Window 4 104 4 109 AIAG D 1 AIM D 1 grade 4 16 international technical specification excerpts D 9 Air Transport Association D 1 Alarms network overview window 4 97 ANGLE 4 77 ANGLE FAILURE 4 60 ANSI D 8 X3 4 D 10 Aperture 4 115 Application Mode demo 3 3 4 47 motion 3 4 4 47 presentation 3 4 4 48 stop and scan 3 4 4 48 supermarket 3 4 4 48 window 4 46 ASCII D 8 Assisted Learn enable 4 103 1 Audio formatted 3 31 Auto learn parameters 4 105 4 110 max exposure 4 114 max gain 4 114 min exposure 4 114 min gain 4 114 photometry 4 22 Automatic Identification Manufacturers International D 1 Automotive Industry Action Group D 1 Axial Nonuniformity 4 17 B Ba
34. at all times but when the camera is exposing the Power Strobe intensity is supplied v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 3 5 Chapter Retry Modes HawkEye 1500 Series Overview Note This selection minimizes the effects of strobing on human vision External When external lighting is selected the HawkEye 1500 will NOT illuminate its internal lighting but will drive an external line to control an external source for the desired exposure time This external line can be wired to an external lighting configuration that is optimal for the unique problem set For more information about wiring etc see Chapter 2 Connecting to the HawkEye 1500 External lighting is allowed in conjunction with the other lighting modes to allow more flexibility in developing lighting solutions In addition four other modes are available by combining the preceding modes On amp External Strobe amp External PowerStrobe amp External On PowerStrobe External Note When Verification is set to AIM DPM 1 2006 Lighting will be set to On When you select the typical application via ReadRunner there is no attempt at setting any retry capabilities This is user dependent The various Retry Modes are described here so you can apply them as needed Time Count GPIO IN 4 Duration ISWT PID List PID List w Acquire 3 6 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Retry
35. camera and click Open ReadRunner loads the file s onto the PC for debugging Ifthe failure was a decode failure you will want to modify the advanced parameters until it passes see Modifying Decoding Parameters on page 4 104 Ifthe failure was a location failure you may need to adjust the ROI see Defining the Region of Interest on page 4 26 4 Press Ctrl Q to return the camera to acquisition see Returning the Camera to Acquisition on page 4 130 Returning the Camera to Acquisition After loading an image file to the HawkEye 1500 camera for reading you can return the camera to acquisition using this menu item To return the camera to acquisition 1 Press Ctrl Q or select Use Camera for Acquisition from the File menu 2 Click Yes when asked if you wish to control camera X ReadRunner resumes reading images placed in its field of view 4 130 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Fine Tuning amp Monitoring Your Application The camera returns to normal acquisition The Filmstrip Recorder You can use the Filmstrip Recorder to save images directly to disk files for debugging purposes It is an alternative to using the Part Queue and the QueueView application Here are some important considerations when choosing between the two methods Part Queue is lossless in the sense that every image inspected will be stored if the qualifier criteria is met However
36. command string is built up using the currently selected image compression ratio Thefinal parameter is a 1 if m_bHookImages is TRUE This command is then sent to the camera using m conn CommandSend Note that the variable bGettingReports is set to TRUE when a REPORTREQ is issued This prevents issuing another request if the timer fires while a is still outstanding This is likely to happen if the application is triggered Please note the use of the progress events from m connection These are used to update the progress bar It is also very important to handle the OnDataTransferAborted event if any command is sent to the camera while a report is being uploaded the transfer will be automatically aborted uz o 0 D When used in this manner the m_connection object can be used almost as if the connection were via a network connection In particular the m connection OnNewRecord event will be received with a MiCycleReport object that can be directly used to update the image and m report views E L d 3 2 4 1 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual F 3 Appendix Custom Programming Using a Serial Connection Complete Source Code Option Explicit Const VIEW TERMINAL 1 Const VIEW IMAGE 2 Const VIEW REPORT 3 Dim WithEvents m coord As MiCoordinator Dim WithEvents m co
37. e Auto Photometry To restore the default settings for the Application Mode 1 From the File menu select Restore Defaults and then Application Mode v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 89 Chapter ReadRunner 2 Click Yes when asked if you wish to control camera X ReadRunner restores the Application Mode options to the default information listed above and saves them to Flash Decoder amp Application Mode To restore the default settings to both the decoder and the Application Mode options 1 Press Ctrl Z or select Restore Defaults and then Both from the File menu 2 Click Yes when asked if you wish to control camera X ReadRunner restores the decoder settings and the Application Mode options to their defaults and saves them to Flash Displaying Verification Report To display a Verification Report 1 Press F2 or select Verification Report from the Windows menu ReadRunner displays the Verification Report window specific to the Verification Mode selected DPM Verification in this example as shown in Figure 4 60 FIGURE 4 60 Verification Report Window Verification Total 1344 Good Fair Po Grade Avg Gade A count B Coun t count D count F Coun Overall Grade Cell Size i Center Offset 4 00 lt 0 NNNM Size Offset 300 1870 0 EE Cell Modulation 300 80 1944 Border Match 4 00 o 8 Symbol Contrast 3 00 0 1944 Axial Nonuniformity 40
38. gt c 6 5 or Chapter Connecting to the HawkEye 1500 FIGURE 2 45 Optional Light Port Cable a 3 250 ab RED RED gt 1 T C DT 22 lt c 2 BLACK BLACK Table 2 25 lists the pinout for the light port TABLE 2 25 Light Port Pinout Pin Signal Name State Voltage Off Open 1 12VDC On Strobe 12V Power Strobe 24V 2 12V return Table 2 26 lists the part number for the optional light port cable TABLE 2 26 Optional Light Port Cable Part Number Microscan PIN A1 40118 1 Cable light port DC power to external light head Do not exceed 0 5 amp continuous current draw or you may damage the HawkEye 1500 2 46 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Mounting Blocks Mounting Blocks Table 2 27 contains the part numbers and descriptions of the four mounting blocks for the HawkEye 1500 camera 2 TABLE 2 27 Mounting Blocks 2 9 Ld Te Part Number Description Used on HawkEye Notes g 5 Standard mounting block 1510 1515 1525 D HEBMA 2 Optional mounting block 1525 1 n HEBMA 3 HE10 mounting block adapter 1510 2 HEBMA 4 HE15 mounting block adapter 1515 3 6 I Notes 1 This mounting block is required for the HawkEye 1525 when mounting the reader where the mounting surface extends to the light This mounting block is
39. p x 6 5 or Three opto isolated outputs are provided The outputs are bipolar isolated switches Ron 35 ohms max Ion lt 50ma Voff lt 50VDC e Four digital I O ports are provided General Purpose I O 1 4 The digital I O ports are individually programmable as inputs or outputs from the camera using Opto 22 G4 type isolator modules e General Purpose I O 1 is also used to optionally control an external strobe light Jumper is provided to select the strobe output or the isolator module The board is provided with a Din Rail mount Figure 2 10 shows the I O expansion module v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 2 13 Chapter Connecting to the HawkEye 1500 FIGURE 2 10 I O Expansion Module lt a E TN Joe Using the I O Expansion Module Sensor Inputs There is one sensor input The sensor input is brought out directly from the 15 pin HD Sub header J1 to barrier strip TB1 positions 4 and 5 The camera sensor trigger input is a bipolar isolated current input and is located within the camera A chassis ground connection is provided on terminal block TB1 position 1 and is used for connecting the sensor cable shield to ch
40. virtually trigger the unit to simulate the Opto Isolated input to further debug and set up This can be accomplished by depressing the Trigger button provided on ReadRunner see Chapter 4 ReadRunner or by issuing the following command VT 2 where 2 is the internal number associated with the Opto Isolated Trigger input Alternately you could also have an external piece of equipment issue the VT command at the desired rate in lieu of using the physical trigger 3 18 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 I O Operations Additional Physical Triggers Available In addition to the Opto Isolated trigger provided on Pin pair 1 11 you could also make use of the 4 TTL inputs to the camera For more information see Field I O Connector on page 2 8 and Advanced I O on page 4 54 Outputs Once an image is decoded the data is sent to the RS 232 Ethernet ports At the same time the HawkEye 1500 sends signals to the I O connector The camera can be configured in such a way as to canmunicate its Read results to an external device via these I O lines The HawkEye 1500 camera s I O connector has the following I O lines Pin pair 2 12 corresponds to Pass signal default assignment e Pin pair 3 13 corresponds to Fail signal default assignment e Pin pair 4 14 corresponds to Data Valid signal default assignment The following four I O Modesare available shown with their d
41. 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 21 Chapter ReadRunner Using ReadRunner The procedures in this section explain Setting Up Photometry on page 4 22 Preprocessing Images on page 4 24 Setting Up Symbology on page 4 25 Defining the Region of Interest on page 4 26 Specifying preferences the application mode serial and TCP IP settings and output format strings beginning on page 4 44 Toggling the Target Laser on page 4 86 Toggling the Beeper on page 4 87 Saving Parameters on the Camera to Flash on page 4 89 Restoring Defaults on page 4 89 Displaying reports and image over a serial connection commands to and from the camera timing and rate information and information about cameras on the network beginning on page 4 90 Setting Up Photometry The HawkEye 1500 camera can use both automatic and manual photometry Auto Photometry Default auto exposure The HawkEye 1500 camera determines lighting control at each trigger and prior to each image scan Manual Photometry For faster read rates you specify the exposure and gain settings To display the Photometry window 1 2 Press Ctrl P or select Photometry from the Settings menu Click Yes when asked if you wish to control camera X ReadRunner displays the Photometry window as shown in Figure 4 14 Auto Photometry selected or Figure 4 15 Manual Photometry selected 4 22 HawkE
42. 1 91 10 2 1 164 10 2 1 76 Controller il Alarms Connections SW Version 10 2 1 127 1417898 5102157 10 2 1 105 19558 3895515 COM2 20247 10 2 1 93 12732 12731 Note Click on a column heading to sort the column Refresh Network This button clears the screen and displays the current cameras on the network Name The network name of the camera IP Address The IP address of the camera i tc tc Status The status ONLINE or OFFLINE of the camera Controller Identifies which connection INTERNAL COM2 an IP address is controlling the camera Cycles The total number of reads the camera has performed Passed The number of successful reads the cameras has performed Failed The number of unsuccessful reads the cameras has performed Alarms The number in red of serious conditions that need attention Connections The number of connections to the camera Note ReadRunner establishes three connections image result command You cannot change the number of connections other than through the process of performing some task using ReadRunner v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 97 Chapter ReadRunner SW Version The version of software running on the camera A V after a version indicates that the camera has a valid Verification License key installed ReadRunner
43. 1500 Series User Manual 1 7 Chapter 72 14mm Configurations HawkEye 1525 FIGURE 1 6 HawkEye 1525 2 840 36 07mm 1 420 116 51mm 4 587 111 76mm ww i 4 400 22 86mm 88 90mm 90 29 97mm 1 180 3 500 59 94mm 2 360 i Em m XX 6 35 F 9 52m m 250 ren OPTIONAL MOUNTING BLOCK The HawkEye 1525 has a medium size light ring built on the front of the unit The ring is 2 375 H 60 33mm x 1 875 H 47 63mm at the center of the emission zone The ring is aimed in 25 to converge 2 25 57 15mm from the front on the unit When the unit is used perpendicular to the part the light acts as a dark field medium to low angle ring light Typically the HawkEye 1525 is used for highly reflective parts Note The HawkEye 1525 XL does not have lasers HawkEye XL details The HawkEye XL is designed for applications requiring ease of integration utilizing fixed optics and integrated lighting but does not need features benefits provided by laser targeting 1 8 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 1 Selecting the Correct HawkEye to Read Your Data Matrix Custom Light Selection 5 HawkEye 1510 5 D FIGURE 1 7 HawkEye 1510 Iz
44. 2008 HawkEye 1500 I O Operations Trigger Diagram 6 This example generates a trigger overrun condition because the delay is set so long that the maximum number of pending triggers 1s exceeded Tq time for max triggers lt time between triggers gt time between triggers FIGURE 3 6 Trigger Diagram Trigger 15 2 T oz me x2 50 IO end start Triggering the Unit Inputs The HawkEye 1500 requiresa trigger to activate scanning There are two types of triggers that control the unit physical hardware and virtual software triggers The selection of which trigger will be used is highly coordinated with the Application Mode selection provided by ReadRunner When you select Demo mode or Supermarket mode the system is virtually triggering itself continuously once an image is taken and handled it virtually triggers itself to initiate another sequence as soon as it completes the previous sequence Therefore the HawkEye 1500 is continuously running and requires no physical triggers to operate When you select Motion mode or Stop and Scan v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 3 17 Chapter HawkEye 1500 Series Overview mode you are configuring the system such that a physical trigger event must occur to initiate the capture and decode sequence Physical Triggers The input lines allow you to add product sensors or user defined
45. 4 46 Format saved images 4 129 strings encodation scheme D 7 Formats image save 4 45 Formatted audio 3 31 output 3 31 Frequently Asked Questions B 1 Front Panel HawkEye 1510 2 45 G Gain 4 24 Gateway 4 66 General Tab 4 45 Growth 4 16 H h Command 6 13 Hardware Settings Installed in Manufacturing 4 99 HawkEye 1510 front panel layout 2 45 Header 4 85 Help Menu about readrunner 4 98 Horizontal Spacing 4 110 Hot Terminal 2 25 1 match list triggered 4 31 I O Behavior Mode 4 54 I Cache Control Command 6 12 Image display tab 4 46 displaying over serial connection 4 91 files load to camera 4 129 folder select 4 127 preprocessing 4 24 rate 4 44 save directory 4 45 save format 4 45 style 4 106 Increment 4 42 Input Opto Wiring 2 20 2 30 INPUT BOTH 4 64 INPUT NEG 4 63 INPUT POS 4 63 Intensity Enhanced Enabled 4 115 Intersymbol Wait 3 4 4 48 4 50 IO Settings Window 4 53 4 54 4 58 IP Address 4 66 4 97 static 4 11 ISO 8859 1 D 10 ISWT 3 4 4 48 Iterations 4 24 J j Command 6 13 Jump to Application Command 6 13 K Keys 4 4 Keywords angle 4 77 checksum 4 77 data 4 77 datahex 4 77 detailed 4 77 pid 4 77 timestamp 4 77 uii only 4 79 uii with info 4 80 veri 1 iaqg 4 77 veri detail 4 78 veri formatted 4 78 veri grade 4 78 veri status 4 78 Index 6 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 L Laser turning on and off 4 86 Last Character Position 4 42
46. 4 describes the power connector signals TABLE 2 4 Power Connector Signals Pin Signal Name 1 Chassis ground 2 24 VDC 3 24V return v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 2 5 Chapter Connecting to the HawkEye 1500 Power Supply Wiring Figure 2 3 and Figure 2 4 show the wiring for the power supply FIGURE 2 3 Power Supplied Via the HEPS 1500 Wall Mount Power Supply Camera HEPS 1500 Power Supply FERRITE BEAD 24 VDC 24 VDC GND GND CHASSIS GND CHASSIS GND Note Ferrite suppression bead is integrated on power supply cable TABLE 2 5 Power Supply Suppliers Supplier Pari Number Microscan HEPS 1500 Wall mount power supply 2 6 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Power Supply Wiring FIGURE 2 4 Power Supplied Via a User Supplied Source Camera User Power Source 2 FERRITE amp BEAD 24 VDC 24 VDC 9 OS 5 gt GND GND 2 or o CHASSIS GND CHASSIS GND Note Ferrite suppression bead is required to meet CE radiated emission requirements TABLE 2 6 Power Cable and Ferrite Bead Suppliers Suppliers Part Number Microscan HEPC 006 Microscan 914 0012 1 Description Single ended power cable 6 Ft w molded ferrite bead EMI Round Cable Suppression Core Fair Rite 0443167251 v2 4 1 Nov
47. 66 4 67 data bits 4 67 flow control 4 67 parity 4 66 4 67 stop bits 4 67 software upgrading C 1 taking control 4 7 upgrading software C 5 CCD 4 100 Cell sample 4 107 unit report 4 114 Certifications D 1 Chart Window 4 94 Check Sum Checking 4 117 4 118 4 119 Checking check sum 4 117 4 118 4 119 start 4 117 stop 4 117 CHECKSUM 4 77 Clear images from camera without uploading 4 127 terminal window 4 92 CLOSE Method 4 25 Index 2 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Color button 4 46 fail 4 46 pass 4 46 Combination I O Board wiring examples 2 26 Command text box 4 94 Commands cach 6 12 cpu 6 11 d 6 4 dbp 6 6 der 6 10 dfb 6 10 display boot params 6 6 command help 6 13 cpu registers 6 11 ethernet registers 6 10 flash blocks 6 10 last logged error 6 13 menu 6 9 system flash size 6 12 system ram size 6 12 test menu 6 5 dm 6 9 dt 6 5 dump memory 6 4 e 6 13 et 6 6 execute test 6 6 file transfer and execute 6 12 flsh 6 12 h 6 13 i cache control 6 12 j 6 13 jump to application 6 13 m 6 5 mbp 6 7 modify boot parameters 6 7 modify memory 6 5 r 6 13 ram 6 12 reset unit 6 13 sending remote to camera 4 94 Index text box 4 93 winr 6 11 wpr 6 11 write mac register 6 11 write phy register 6 11 X 6 12 Common Terminal 2 25 Communications configuration window 4 64 4 71 Confidence 4 113 Configuration File loading 4 20 saving 4 19 Configuring the Part Queue 4 120 Connections
48. ANGLE FAILURE line will be ON triggering is on a rising edge triggering is on a falling edge INPUT POS This behavior determines the trigger direction of an input INPUT NEG This behavior determines the trigger direction of an input v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 63 Chapter ReadRunner INPUT BOTH This behavior determines the trigger direction of an input triggering is on both edges For additional information about IO Behavior Modes see Outputs on page 3 19 Serial TCP Settings The HawkEye 1500 camera can communicate using either RS 232 serial communications or TCP IP When using TCP IP the HawkEye 1500 camera can utilize Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP for dynamic IP addressing You can also configure the camera to use a static IP address If you do not have a network connection available you must use RS 232 communications to configure and control the camera If you do have a network connection available please contact your MIS administrator to determine if your network uses DHCP addressing or to obtain a unique static IP address To display the Communications Configuration window 1 Press Ctrl J or select Serial TCP Settings from the Settings menu 2 Click Yes when asked if you wish to control camera X ReadRunner displays the Communications Configuration window as shown in Figure 4 47 4 64 HawkEye 1500 Series User Ma
49. Connect to the camera and see if you get any text If nothing comes out press Ctrl T This control character causes the camera to dump an information string If you don t get a string then your serial port parameters do not match the camera You must try different settings until they match and you get characters from the camera If you get a string that looks like gt type in cmd console 0 and reboot the unit Reconnect to the camera and verify that result strings are properly received and displayed Once you get a set of serial parameters that work you can use a series of commands to determine the camera configuration In HyperTerminal press Ctrl S to take control of the unit and take it offline Then press Ctrl P to get a prompt and activate terminal echo over the serial port The following commands tell you how the camera is configured IPCONFIG Displays the name of the camera and its current IP address DHCP Returns Y if DHCP is on or N if DHCP is off You can use this information to verify the network configuration Use the IP command to change the name of the camera and the address you want to use when DHCP addressing is disabled have DHCP activated but the camera reports 169 254 x x address What s happening If your HawkEye 1500 is programmed for DHCP addressing and there is no DHCP available the HawkEye 1500 defaults to a class B address in the 169 254 x x subnet This is similar
50. Data Matrix The Data Matrix is a unique machine readable symbol capable of storing a large amount of information within a small physical size v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual D 1 Appendix Symbology Reference The Data Matrix symbology allows for two dimensional encoding and decoding For the first time users are no longer constrained by the limitations of a printed symbol Now with the Data Matrix symbology users have the ability to Select the output size ranging from 0 001 square inches to 14 square inches regardless of the amount of data encoded Encode up to 3116 numeric characters or 2335 alphanumeric characters in a single symbol Encode and read many supported international languages Easily integrate with existing computer systems Data Matrix symbols are capable of carrying 25 to 100 times more information than the typical barcode This range is directly related to the image quality that the printer is capable of producing The following summarizes characteristics of Data Matrix Both height and width are used to encode data Works with contrast as low as 20 Readable through 360 of rotation Designed to survive harsh industrial environments Codes can be marked on the surface of a part without using a paper label Several error correction schemes are available to optimize symbol damage recovery Advanced image processing is used for higher read rates of cluttered and or d
51. Decode Locate Failure OFF ON POOR OFF ON FAIR ON ON halfway between GOOD and POOR GOOD ON OFF Beeper The HawkEye 1500 camera s beeper e Is user configurable Indicates Pass Fail conditions Assists in the alignment of the symbol during setup QuicSet Figure 2 42 shows the location of the QuicSet recessed button FIGURE 2 42 Location of QuicSet Recessed Button ETHERNET PWR LK ACT QuicSet QuicSet Switch 2 44 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Front Panel HawkEye 1510 Front Panel HawkEye 1510 Figure 2 43 shows the layout of the front panel for the HawkEye 1510 FIGURE 2 43 Front Panel Layout HawkEye 1510 only Light Port Connector CS Lens Mount Light Port Connector 12 VDC out e CS Lens Mount 5mm extension required to support C Mount lenses 5 mm extension tube part number is 928 0047 1 Light Port Connector Figure 2 44 shows the pinout for the light port connector FIGURE 2 44 Light Port Connector 1 Table 2 24 lists the supplier for the light port mating connector TABLE 2 24 Light Port Mating Connector Supplier Supplier Part Number Molex 51090 0200 2 Position housing 50212 8100 Crimp terminal v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual N go zo D zo L d Ox
52. For i 1 To btnConnect Count If btnConnect 1 Caption m connection Device Name Then m_bInUpdateButtons True btnConnect i Value vbUnchecked btnConnect 1 Refresh m_bInUpdateButtons False End If Next i Disconnect End If If btnConnect Index Value vbChecked Then Connect btnConnect Index Caption End If UpdateButtons End Sub F 6 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Complete Source Code Private Sub ShowView v As Long Select Case v Case VIEW TERMINAL m terminal Visible True m image Visible False m report Visible False Case VIEW IMAGE m terminal Visible False m image Visible True m report Visible False Case VIEW REPORT m terminal Visible False m image Visible False m report Visible True End Select End Sub Private Sub Form Resize On Error Resume Next Dim y As Long y 0 y y btnConnect 1 Height Dim w As Long w ScaleWidth 3 m_countTotal Move 0 y w m countPassed Move w y w m countFailed Move 2 w y w m countTotal Height m progress Move 0 ScaleHeight m progress Height ScaleWidth E m tabstrip Move 0 y ScaleWidth ScaleHeight y m progress Height E With m tabstrip 52 m terminal Move ClientLeft ClientTop ClientWidth S c ClientHeight amp m image Move ClientLeft ClientTop ClientWidth ClientHeight m report Move Cli
53. Frequently Asked Questions Is the Exposure in the Photometry dialog and command the same as the Shutter on the HawkEye 15 Yes it is an electronic shutter internal to the CCD It can be set between 30 usec and 20000 usec It is the time during which light is integrated by the CCD sensor and also the time the light remains ON when in Strobe or Power Strobe 00 When using an external fast Xenon srobe then the duration of the strobe pulse is no longer controlled by the camera and the exposure acts as an electronic shutter as opposed to also controlling the duration of the light remaining on This allows for shorter light pulses than 30 usec for very fast motion applications d Oo x o gt cs otc 55 2 5 What exactly happens with auto photometry when using sensor as a trigger The HawkEye has only one chance to get an image so can only imagine that the settings adjusted after each image hoping that the adjustment will be appropriate for the next part Am I correct In Motion mode the Auto Photometry is turned off as this requires up to 5 small pictures which take about 10 msec each By the time the Exposure and Gain are figured out the part would have moved out of the field of view In this mode Manual Photometry should be used In Stop and Scan mode Auto Photometry can be used trying to re install all my computer software after it was attacked by a virus When I run
54. Latch 3 10 Latin Alphabet No 1 D 10 Layout rear panel 2 4 LEARN 4 61 Learn button 4 14 4 102 decoder settings 4 101 decoder settings only 4 102 enable assisted 4 103 photometry 4 101 photometry and decoder settings 4 102 photometry only 4 102 window 4 14 4 102 Learning decoder settings 4 101 photometry 4 101 LEDs ethernet 2 42 link 2 43 mode 2 43 power 2 42 status 2 43 Lens selecting 1 5 Light Port Connector 2 45 Lighting modes 3 4 selecting 1 6 specifying 4 22 specifying type 4 49 Link LEDs 2 43 List of Cameras 4 127 Live Video 4 12 Load configuration file to camera 4 20 image files to camera 4 129 registry file C 7 Vx Works kernel C 7 Locate Fail 4 86 LOCATE FAILURE 4 60 Index M m Command 6 5 MAC Address 4 66 Manual Photometry 4 22 Manufacturing Data 4 99 MASK 4 61 Match behavior of wildcard 4 40 fail 4 86 pass 4 86 string 4 86 Match List triggered i o 4 31 MATCH FAILURE 4 60 MATCH SET 4 61 Matching setting up serial number 4 41 setting up text 4 29 Matrix height 4 108 width 4 108 Max barcode height 4 111 length 4 111 width 4 112 number of bars 4 112 Max FTP Records 4 125 MAX MIN 4 62 Maximum Records 4 122 mbp Command 6 7 Memory 4 16 Menus 4 2 Methods close 4 25 dilate 4 25 erode 4 25 open 4 25 Min barcode height 4 111 length 4 111 width 4 111 number of bars 4 112 quiet zone length 4 112 threshold 4 113 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual Index 7
55. Matrix v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual D 13 Appendix Symbology Reference Symbol Samples 2 D Symbols Data Matrix Data 123456789 es Et g 000 ECCO50 ECCO80 ECC100 ECC140 ECC200 PDF417 Data PDF417 sample 1 D Symbols Code 128 Data This is Code 128 12345 90 Code 93 Data 1234 CODE 93 1234567890 34 D 14 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Symbol Samples Code 39 Data ABCD CODE 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 Data 25251234567890 1234567890 Codabar Data 1234567890 A1234557890B EAN 13 Data 9876543210999 mM 99 09 c o tc gt 92 Q gt o EAN 8 Data 76543210 ill 5 2 4 1 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual D 15 Appendix Symbology Reference UPC A Data 98765432109 87654 32109 5 Digit Postnet with Check Character Data 020215 SEMI 412 with Both Start Stop amp Checksum Data AQQ45670 Pharmacode Data 399 D 16 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Specifications selection selection APPENDIX E
56. Modes Light Time You may specify that if the Decode attempt of a symbol fails the HawkEye 1500 retry for up to 1 minute The HawkEye 1500 will perform automatic photometry if selected and capture a new image and then attempt to decode the symbol again The HawkEye 1500 will report only one success or one failure no matter how many times the retry is attempted In other words if the retry time is set to 10 seconds and the decode is successful on the 7th attempt only one Success report and signal will be sent from the HawkEye 1500 If the HawkEye 1500 fails after 10 seconds only one Failure message will be reported The normal application to use retry attempts is in the Stop and Scan application mode Basically you are indicating that when the triggered input occurs the part may not exactly be in the field of view at exactly the time of the trigger Retry attempts will be made and only one report will be issued Typically you would not have time to perform retries in a motion application gt in 2 T oz me 9 Go IO Count You may specify that if the decode attempt of a symbol fails the HawkEye 1500 will retry up to 15 times The HawkEye 1500 will perform automatic photometry if selected capture a new image and then attempt to decode the symbol again The HawkEye 1500 will report only one success or one failure no matter how many times the retry is attempted In othe
57. ReadRunner Note The RESET FACTORY command restores the camera to factory settings and runs the stored hardware specific commands The RESET ALL command restores the factory settings runs the stored hardware commands and runs the stored customer commands For more information about either command see the HawkEye 1500 Series Reference and Programmers Manual Fine Tuning amp Monitoring Your Application The procedures in this section explain e Selecting Symbologies 1D or 2D on page 4 100 e Learning amp Unlearning on page 4 101 e Modifying Decoding Parameters on page 4 104 e Debugging Images on page 4 120 Selecting Symbologies 1D or 2D Camera Resolution and Pixels The number of pixels within the CCD array determines camera resolution The more pixels in the captured image the higher the resolution or quality of the image Determining the correct camera resolution for the application is an important part of the HawkEye 1500 camera setup The HawkEye 1500 requires that each cell in a Data Matrix symbol have a minimum pixel grid of 5x5 to obtain maximum performance Ensure that you select a matrix size that allows you to obtain this pixel to cell ratio The example in Figure 4 68 depicts a magnified view of a partial image Notice that each cell contains the minimum number of pixels 4 100 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Fine Tuning amp Monitoring Your
58. TRIG 2 When read is completed reader sets either Pass or Fail 3 User accepts Pass Fail result and then negates TRIG 4 Reader detects TRIG negated and then negates both Pass and Fail 3 24 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 I O Operations DV 2 Line Verify Full HS The DV 2 Line Verify Full HS Mode drives the Good and Poor lines when the results of the verification are completed see Table 3 2 for the line states of Good Fair Poor and Fail This mode then drives the Data Valid line to indicate that the Good and Poor lines are valid and stable The lines will be set to the desired polarity and will stay at that polarity until the next trigger initiates a new acquisition Figure 3 11 depicts a Trigger occurring which initiates an Image acquisition which in turn is passed on to the Decoder for analysis Once the outcome is determined the Good Fair Poor or Fail is presented on the I O lines until the next trigger occurs FIGURE 3 11 DV 2 Line Verify Full HS Trigger gt o gt o gt o Acquire 5 e e LO 2 x gt I Decode Present Good Poor DV Notes 1 When DV is false you can start read by asserting TRIG 2 When read is completed reader sets the Good Fair Poor Fail state and asserts DV after 2ms setup time 3 User accepts the Good Fair Poor Fail result and then n
59. The CONSOLE command directs the camera to connect its operating system debugging console to a particular serial port The serial port surfaced on the camera is port 2 so use the command CONSOLE 2 to redirect the debugging console accordingly Once the debugging console is set result data will no longer be sent to the serial port B 4 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Frequently Asked Questions Note Once this option is set your camera is unusable over the serial port To restore the camera s normal serial port connectivity issue the command CONSOLE 0 from the Terminal window in ReadRunner 00 A connection has taken control of my camera and can t regain control Is there a way to break this control so can get it back Yes You have three options 1 Reboot camera Oo x o gt cs ot 55 2 5 Im 2 Connect your serial cable to the camera open HyperTerminal and connect to the camera Press Ctrl S to forcibly take control of the camera and take it offline You should see an information string with details about the name of the camera current counts software version etc when this happens Press Ctrl R to release control and put it back online 3 Ifthe camera is under control via an Ethernet connection disconnect the Ethernet cable from the camera Wait a few seconds and plug it back in Any Ethernet connections are cleared and you should be able to
60. This appendix contains specifications and dimensions for the HawkEye 1500 camera and for the mounting block and adapter TABLE E 1 Specifications HawkEye 1510 HawkEye 1515 HawkEye 1525 Height 44 45mm 1 750 44 45mm 1 750 59 94mm 2 360 Width 57 15mm 2 250 57 15mm 2 250 72 14mm 2 840 Depth 93 98mm 3 700 111 76mm 4 400 111 76mm 4 400 Weight 0 25 Kg 0 55 Ibs 0 4 Kg 0 9 Ibs 0 4 Kg 0 9 Ibs Power 24 volts 350ma Typical Optional Power Supply P N HEPS 1500 Minimum 2096 630nm Contrast Lighting Optional 3 5 Light Port Integrated high output Integrated high output cable bright field LED with dark field LED with strobe operation strobe operation Working Dependent on lens Dependent on model Dependent on model Distance selection selection selection Min Element Dependent on lens Dependent on model Dependent on model Size selection selection selection FOV Dependent on lens Dependent on model Dependent on model selection v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 2 S 6 o Appendix Specifications TABLE E 1 Specifications Continued Decode Capability Verification 2 D Data Matrix PDF417 1 D Code 39 Codabar Code 93 120f5 UPC EAN UPC E UPC Supplementals Postnet Pharmacode Code 128 1 ISO IEC 16022 2000 Data Matrix 2 ISO IEC 15415 2004 Data Matrix 3 ISO IEC 15416 2000 one dimensional barc
61. Tuning amp Monitoring Your Application List of Cameras Select the camera whose part queue you want to view You can edit the text in this drop down list of cameras to enter a static IP address for a reachable camera on a different subnet a Highlight Enter Static Address b Enter the IP address and press Return Refresh Part Queue Information This button clears the screen and displays the most current cameras on the network Upload Part Queue clear from camera Uploads the images to QueueView and removes them from the camera 4 Clear images from camera without uploading If you click this button QueueView displays the Are you sure dialog box as shown in Figure 4 83 FIGURE 4 83 Are you sure Dialog Box Are you sure x Are you sure you want to clear all reports from the camera without uploading them This cannot be undone i gt oc oc Arrow Keys Allows you to move through all the images uploaded from the part queue When you click on a specific image the report information for that image is displayed in the report panel Save Images Select one of the following e Save Current Image Saves the current image e Save All Images Saves all images Select Image Folder Specifies the folder where you want to save the image or images Note These buttons are activated after you upload the part queue
62. User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner FIGURE 4 30 Example 1 005 9 Ter Matched Matched Matched Matched Matched Matched FIGURE 4 31 Example 2 HawkEyeEO05E9 ReadRunner File Settings Windows Help i o c gt oc tc HawkEyeEO0SE9 _ Add Camera Take Control Terminal Filmstrip Network Total Pass Fail Cursor asi asss 99 01 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 39 Chapter ReadRunner FIGURE 4 32 Example 3 Behavior of the Wildcard Match The behavior of the wildcard match is A case sensitive match is performed are wildcard characters in the pattern as well as potentially valid characters in the string wildcard character represents 0 or more characters in a string e asa wildcard character represents 1 and only 1 character in a string f are found in the string the pattern can have either a describing that position however the pattern will also match any string with something at that position other than or 1 the and in the pattern are seen as wildcards first and characters second Examples of this behavior are string matches string string matches string string matches any string 4 40 HawkEye 1500 Series User Man
63. Version Number To display the ReadRunner version number select About ReadRunner from the Help menu ReadRunner displays the About ReadRunner window Note For proper operation make sure the version of the software displayed in the Network Overview Window matches the ReadRunner revision used to connect to the camera Contact Microscan to ensure you have the latest copy of software e Details This button displays the Settings screen as shown in Figure 4 67 When a camera is selected the detail button displays the settings screen 4 98 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner FIGURE 4 67 Settings Window The RESET FACTORY Hardware Settings Installed in Manufacturing command runs these settings The RESET ALL command runs these settings BAR 412 OFF BAR33 ON lt Manufacturing Data This can be any Manufacturing data you want to place in the camera i c gt tc 79 tc 1 lot numbers 2 test results 3 any accounting information Hardware Settings Installed in Manufacturing These settings depend on the hardware purchased by the customer Customer Settings Installed in Manufacturing These settings depend on the customer s specifications Manufacturing Data These are such things as MAC address serial numbers and so on v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 99 Chapter
64. a No report Successful read symbol a No report Successful read symbol a No report Successful read symbol a No report m Successful read symbol No report Remove symbol a Present symbol b 3 Failed read Successful read symbol b Report Failed read ISWT w Successful read symbol b No report Failed read Failed read Present symbol a mum Successful read symbol a Report Successful read symbol a No report Successful read symbol a No report in 2 T 2 me x2 Go IO m Successful read symbol a No report An ISWT equal to 0 indicates an infinite inter symbol wait time and no duplicate code will be reported This is applicable to scenario 2 above Note In order for the ISWT to work correctly it must be greater than the Cycle Time reported on the ReadRunner camera report ISWT 0 indicates an infinite inter symbol wait time and no duplicate code will be reported PID List The Retry List mode is differs considerably from those modes previously described The most notable difference is that NO new image is acquired All retry attempts are made on the same image Therefore you can use this mode in a Motion Application Care must be taken that the retry list is not long enough to cause a trigger overrun The Retry List mode is associated with Product
65. a symbol that is bad before itsimply fails the symbol and moves on to reading other symbols For additional information see Read Timeout on page 4 52 it o c c gt tc Range 0 9999ms Default 600ms Cell Sample This pull down menu specifies cell sampling Range 1 7 Default 5 Pixels per Cell This pull down menu specifies the expected cell width It is recommended that the Field of View FOV of the camera be chosen such that the Cell Size of the Data Matrix is between 5 and 10 pixels The cell size can be estimated as follows using the values obtained after a successful learn v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 107 Chapter ReadRunner Matrix Height in pixels Matrix Width in pixels Number of Rows Number of Columns Typically the decode algorithm operates with maximum robustness when Pixel Per Cell is set to the estimated cell size In the HawkEye 1500 the Pixel Per Cell is always set to the default value of 6 pixels after a learn in order to speed up the decode process for most of the applications You can enhance robustness by adjusting this parameter On the other hand if the quality of the Data Matrix 1s high then lowering the cell size value slightly will not affect the read rates but will further speed up the Read cycle When the cell size drops to 3 pixels or less however the locate decode time will increase and the robustness
66. all will throw exception on conect if in use by another application On Error GoTo err Dim serial As New MiASCIIConnection serial Connect port If serial Connected Then End If serial Disconnect CheckSerialPort True Set serial Nothing Exit Function err Set serial Nothing CheckSerialPort False End Function Private Sub Connect targ As String m_coord DeviceFocusSet targ End Sub o D D Private Sub m connection OnConnectionReset Dim i As Long m bGettingReport Fals If m connection IsConnected Then SerialHook Enabled True E S D E 9 0 5 o Else SerialHook Enabled False Eno Le v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual F 5 Appendix Custom Programming Using a Serial Connection End Sub Private Sub UpdateButtons Dim i As Long m blInUpdateButtons True If m connection IsConnected Then For i 1 To btnConnect Count If m connection Device Name lt gt btnConnect Caption Then btnConnect i Value vbUnchecked Else btnConnect i Value vbChecked End If Next i Else For i 1 To btnConnect Count btnConnect i Value vbUnchecked Next i End If m_bInUpdateButtons False End Sub Private Sub Disconnect m_coord DeviceFocusSet End Sub Private Sub btnConnect_Click Index As Integer If m bInUpdateButtons Then Exit Sub If m connection IsConnected Then Dim i As Long
67. b uo lt se o IO Present Pass Fail DV Notes 1 When DV is false you can start read by asserting TRIG 2 When read is completed reader sets Pass Fail and asserts DV after 2ms setup time 3 User accepts Pass Fail result and then negates TRIG 4 Reader detects TRIG negated and then negates DV v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 3 23 Chapter HawkEye 1500 Series Overview Pass Fail Only Full Handshake Trigger Acquire Decode Present Pass Fail Note The discussion of pin pairs assumes a default assignment of the I O lines The Pass Fail Only Full Handshake Mode drives pin pair 2 12 when the results of the Decode are a success and at the same time drives pin pair 3 13 to the opposite direction When the results of the Decode are a failure it drives pin pair 3 13 and at the same time drives pin pair 2 12 to the opposite direction The line will be set to the desired polarity and will stay at that polarity until the next trigger initiates a new acquisition Figure 3 10 depicts a Trigger occurring which initiates an Image acquisition which in turn is passed on to the Decoder for analysis Once the outcome is determined the Pass or Fail is presented on the I O lines until the next trigger occurs FIGURE 3 10 Pass Fail Only Full Handshake Notes 1 When both Pass and Fail are false you can start read by asserting
68. currently on the network For more information about adding a camera see Add em Adding amp Taking Control of a Camera on page 4 7 This button indicates that the camera sqa001 has been added but not selected maid blue background and broken connection and the connection is over TCP IP 001 This button indicates that the camera sqa001 has been added selected green background and unbroken connection and the connection is over TCP IP This button indicates that the camera has been added but not selected blue background and that the connection is a serial connection This button indicates that the camera has been added and selected green background and that the connection is a serial connection COMI HIN This is the Take Control button Click it to control a camera to adjust camera position modify parameters or reset statistics For more information about ne Penal controlling a camera see Adding amp Taking Control of a Camera on page 4 7 This button indicates that the camera sqa001 is being controlled by a user Release This is the Release button Click it to release control of a camera For more information about releasing a camera see Releasing Control of a Camera on page 4 21 4 6 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Setting Up Your Application Setting Up Your Application The procedures in this section ex
69. e nobtl This option clears the Load Bootloader option e name This option allows you choose the specific camera to update by name Use the following procedure to upgrade the camera using Flasher 1 Select Start Programs ReadRunner Utilities and HawkEye Flasher The Flasher window is displayed as shown in Figure 3 C 6 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using HawkEye Flasher 2 From the Camera pull down menu select the camera whose software you want to upgrade Note You can also select Static IP Address If you do so the Enter Camera Static IP Address dialog box is displayed Enter a valid IP address and click OK 3 Select Load Registry File This is the camera s system Registry and is similar to the Window s Registry 4 Click and navigate to Camera Binary folder in ReadRunner folder Highlight registry bin 5 Select Load vxWorks Kernel File This is the camera s software kernel 6 Click and navigate to the Camera Binary folder in the ReadRunner folder Highlight vxWorks bin s i Og 50 i e a 7 Select Load Bootloader File This is the software that boots the camera Click and navigate to the Camera Binary folder in the ReadRunner folder Highlight bootloader bin Note Always load the version of the Bootloader that corresponds to the version of vxWork
70. fuse socket which doubles as a fuse 5 volt OK test circuit When the green LED SVOK is ON it indicates that both 5 volts and the fuse are OK Note There is no connector for connecting external 5 volts Table 2 10 lists the part numbers for the Smart Camera I O board and interface cables TABLE 2 10 I O Expansion Module Suppliers Part Number Description 003 406000 Expansion Module includes 966 0183 1 Cable HD Sub 15 connector M M 10 Feet Optional Cables 966 0183 2 Cable HD Sub 15 connector M M 15 Feet 966 0183 3 Cable HD Sub 15 connector M M 25 Feet l O Expansion Module Connectors I O Interface Connector J1 Figure 2 11 shows the pinout for the HDB 15S connector FIGURE 2 11 Field I O HDB 15S Connector 110 e e e e ce e e e 10 18 e e e 5 2 16 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 TABLE 2 11 Pinout I O Interface Connector J1 I O Expansion Module Optional 2 Pin Description Do 1 Sensor Input A 2 Opto Output 1 A 9 al 3 Opto Output 2 A oF 4 Opto Output 3 A 8 En 5 General Purpose 1 or Strobe 2 6 24 volts 5 7 General Purpose 2 8 General Purpose I O 3 9 General Purpose 4 10 24 volt return Ground 11 Sensor Input B 12 Opto Output 1 B 13 Opto Output 2 B 14 Opto Output 3 B 15 I O Return Ground Shell Chassis Ground Opto In Opto Out amp
71. provided The HawkEye 1500 can retry by count v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 3 1 Chapter HawkEye 1500 Series Overview time or for the duration of an input signal For more information see Retry Modes on page 3 6 There are several options available for configuring digital I O To interface to external equipment you have the option of either using a timed data valid signal or a full handshake For more information see HawkEye 1500 I O Operations on page 3 10 The HawkEye 1500 also provides a rich set of ways to send data to external equipment either using serial or network connections The capabilities are very powerful but are also very simple to use The options range from sending the decode data as a simple ASCII string via the serial port up to sending a Cycle Report for each decode The Cycle Report includes counts timing data and much more and may even contain images Libraries are included that allow custom data collection applications to be easily written using Visual Basic For more information see Displaying Camera Report Information on page 4 15 The normal operational mode of the HawkEye 1500 is called online In this mode the results of each decode are sent to all connected client applications Without taking the camera out of this mode it is possible to program the camera and change parameters on the fly This is called taking control of the unit
72. read rates and speeds up processing To define an ROI 4 26 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner 2 Click Yes when asked if you wish to control camera X 3 Click J ROI ReadRunner displays a search ROI as shown in Figure 4 18 FIGURE 4 18 ROI Window rschawkeye CTRL ReadRunner ET File oe Windows Help a E bil Release Photomety Lean I o c gt tc tc Total Pass Cursor _ Or C M z ifistart T rschawkeye CTRL 10034M 4 Usethe mouse to define a smaller search area in the camera s field of view Adjust the ROI from any of its four corners v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 27 Chapter ReadRunner Copying Current to PID This menu item allows you to copy the current settings always PIDO to a different PID 1 through 15 Each PID contains the following information TABLE 4 4 Parameters Stored in Each PID Parameter Photometry Notes Gain amp Exposure only NOTE If Autophotometry is ON System parameters then these PID settings are NOT used PreProcessing Morphology operator and iterations Decoder All decoder parameters ReadRunner maintains the list of PIDs that are active that were copied from Current for use in the Advanced Retry modes
73. reconnect to the camera and regain control When disconnect the network cable from the PC while the camera is under control by ReadRunner reconnecting the network cable will not allow ReadRunner to take control again What do I do ReadRunner cannot regain control of the camera because control was not properly released when the network cable was disconnected from the PC Use option 3 in the previous FAQ to regain control of the camera had control of the camera over the serial port and left the machine for a few minutes When came back the camera was no longer under control What happened When you have control of the camera over the serial port control is maintained as long as there is input activity on the serial port If there is no activity for 2 minutes then the camera is released and put back online 1f it was offline To v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual B 5 Appendix Troubleshooting amp Frequently Asked Questions override this timeout take control of the camera and type Ctrl S a second time The timeout is now disabled until you release control again You can use the ONLINE command see the HawkEye 1500 Series Reference and Programmer Manual to put the unit back online and maintain control I m using the Part Queue to record images on the camera but after a while the camera runs much slower What s going on The Part Queue mechanism of the camera can store typically up to 30 se
74. sources to sense products marked with the Data Matrix symbol A product passes through the sensor mounted in proximity of the monitored manufacturing line Once the sensor s path is broken a trigger signal is sent to the HawkEye 1500 via the I O connector The HawkEye 1500 receives the signal and tells the camera to capture the upcoming image Then the image is decoded and data is sent to the RS 232 Ethernet ports At the same time the camera sends signals to the I O connector as output signals for you For more information see Outputs on page 3 19 Typically this trigger is an external device hardwired to the Opto Isolated pin provided on the HawkEye 1500 series connector See Field I O Connector on page 2 8 When the trigger input 1s received the HawkEyeTM 1500 will initiate the sequence If the trigger input is received too fast such that the HawkEyeTM 1500 cannot keep up the camera will issue a RTE Real Time Error condition This condition is reported in several ways one is via the user configurable RTE Error message string see Output Format Strings on page 4 71 and via the digital output line that has been assigned to report the RTE state of the HawkEye 1500 connector see Field I O Connector on page 2 8 and also to ReadRunner through the internal reporting mechanism see Chapter 4 ReadRunner Virtual Triggers When configuring the HawkEye 1500 with your external equipment you can
75. the HawkEye 1500 camera will read If the decoder is opened up that is no learn has occurred you can specify which symbols you want read By de selecting symbols you can reduce decode time To display the Symbology and Verification window 1 Press Ctrl V or select Symbology and Verification from the Settings menu 2 Click Yes when asked if you wish to control camera X ReadRunner displays the Symbology and Verification window as shown in Figure 4 17 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 25 Chapter ReadRunner FIGURE 4 17 Symbology Verification Window HawkEyeE000A0 CTRL Symbology Verification Symbology Verification Enable Data Matrix 41 Enable Barcodes 128 Code 33 v Code 2 of 5 v Codabar LIPC EAN Specification ANSI Barcode C 18065 Data Matrix C Verification 150 Data Matrix C AIMDPM Verification LIPC E UPS Supplemental v PDF417 BC412 Postnet Pharma ASS 14 v RSS Limited ASS Expanded RSS Stacked ASS Composite OR Code 3 Specify the kinds of symbols the HawkEye 1500 camera will read Enable Data Matrix Specifies that Data Matrix symbols will be read Enable Barcodes Specifies that Barcode symbols will be read Defining the Region of Interest Defining a region of interest ROI within the HawkEye 1500 camera s Field of View improves
76. the ReadRunner install neither the Repair option nor the Remove option seems to do anything How can re install ReadRunner once this happens ReadRunner uses InstallShield as its install engine All InstallShield installation projects use an identifier or GUID to identify whether or not the software is installed on the system When the installation is run and the GUID is detected you get the Repair Remove dialog that lets you re run the install with everything that was selected or remove the software However if a virus has wiped out some of this information you may not be able to re install To forcibly re install find the hidden folder Installshield Installation Information under C Program Files and delete the folder 2D1FFAOF F587 11D6 8110 00C04F606F20 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual B 7 Appendix Troubleshooting amp Frequently Asked Questions The next time you run the install it will operate as if the software is installing for the first time Sometimes when using a Logitech mouse and scrolling with the wheel see crashes in ReadRunner especially in the Network Overview form What can do to fix this behavior This occurs with older Logitech mouse drivers when trying to scroll the Microsoft FlexGrid control with the wheel Updating to the latest Logitech drivers will fix this problem available on the Logitech website Trouble Reading Setting the HawkEye 1500 to Factory
77. their private peer to peer connection v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 2 1 Chapter Connecting to the HawkEye 1500 TABLE 2 1 HawkEye 1500 TCP IP Connectivity Port Name Protocol Number Note Camera Query Port UDP 49093 Discovers HawkEye 1500 cameras on the current subnet Camera Announce UDP 49094 Broadcasts the HawkEye 1500 camera identity Port on the current subnet used by Network View in ReadRunner provides general counters camera name IP IP in control camera status and camera software version and capability COMMAND TCP 49095 Used for all HawkEye 1500 ASCII Commands including accessing Buffered cycle read reports PARTQ commands STANDARD SERIAL N A Programs the format of the data sent via the serial port STANDARD TCP 49096 Used by ReadRunner and programming COM object library for reports with images By default lossy up to 2 per second Connection can be programmed to lossless i e inline with the read cycle STANDARD TCP 49097 Used by ReadRunner and programming COM object library for reports only By default lossy but at maximum network rate Connection can be programmed to lossless i e inline with the read cycle TCP1 User TCP 49098 User format configurable TCP based connection Connection Uses ASCII and binary keywords IDxx CDxx etc Note that the connection is always lossless i e inline with the read cycle TCP2 Us
78. to how Windows 2000 and XP function It also allows you to connect a Windows 2000 PC and HawkEye 1500 with a cross link Ethernet cable and leave DHCP addressing activated but still communicate Both sides of the connection pick a different 169 254 x x address and should communicate normally B 2 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Frequently Asked Questions How tell if the IP configuration of my PC and my camera are valid 00 Your PC and camera must be operating on the same subnet The Subnet Mask determines the base address of the subnet Typically the subnet is either 255 255 0 0 Class B or 255 255 255 0 Class C For Class B this means the first two numbers of the address define the subnet and the last two can be any numbers from 1 to 255 each For Class C this means the first 3 numbers define the subnet and the last number can be any number from 1 to 255 You can determine your PC s network configuration from a Command Prompt by running ipconfig all This utility displays each network entity and all its details Ensure that the PC and the camera have identical subnets and valid IP addresses D x o gt cs ot 55 2 5 How I restore the camera to factory defaults ReadRunner allows you to restore the decoder and or application mode settings to factory defaults Some settings are persistent still speaker on off communication settings e
79. v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 6 15 Chapter The Bootloader 6 16 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 aeEwoxA HawkEye M 1510 This appendix contains information specific to the HawkEye 1510 Smart Camera Based Reader FIGURE A 1 HawkEye 1510 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual A 1 gt uw T o 2 x gt Appendix HawkEye 1510 Optics The HawkEye 1510 uses the following lenses e CS Mount Lenses e C Mount Lenses requires 5 mm extension Microscan part number 928 0047 1 CS mount 5mm C mount TABLE A 1 Lens Sizes and Microscan Part Numbers Part Number Size C Mount Lenses Requires 5mm extension Microscan P N 928 0047 1 928 0057 1 Lens 8mm F 1 4 16 Filter Thread 25 5mm P 0 5mm 928 0057 2 Lens 12mm F 1 8 16 Filter Thread 25 5mm P 0 5mm 928 0057 3 Lens 16mm F 1 4 16 Filter Thread 25 5mm P 0 5mm 928 0057 4 Lens 25mm F 1 6 16 Filter Thread 25 5mm P 0 5mm 928 0057 5 Lens 35mm F 2 1 22 Filter Thread 25 5mm P 0 5mm 928 0057 6 Lens 50mm F 2 8 22 Filter Thread 25 5mm P 0 5mm 928 0057 7 Lens 75mm F 3 9 32 Filter Thread 25 5mm P 0 5mm CS Mount Lenses 928 0049 1 Lens 2 8mm F 1 3 C 928 0049 2 Lens 4mm F 1 2 C 928 0049 3 Lens 8mm F 1 2 C 928 0049 4 Lens 16mm F 1 4 C A 2 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 20
80. 0 1944 Print Growth 400 1944 D Unused Error Correction 4 00 Angle of Distortion 4 00 4 90 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner Reports amp Images Over A Serial Connection You can connect to the HawkEye 1500 camera serially or over TCP IP When you connect serially ReadRunner displays different buttons than the buttons you see when you are connected over TCP IP as shown in Figure 4 61 FIGURE 4 61 Buttons When Connected Serially COM1 ReadRunner File Settings Windows Help 4 COM1 Add Camera Hook Reports al h Hook Images 32 1 Compression Unlike when connected over TCP IP when connected over serial connection you have to request that ReadRunner display reports and images You can display both reports and images at the same time To display reports 1 Click Hook Reports 2 From the pull down menu select All or Failures To display images tc tc 1 Click Hook Images 2 From the pull down menu select the amount of compression each image should have No Compression 4 1 Compression 8 1 Compression 16 1 Compression 32 1 Compression Commands Sent To and Output From the Camera From the Terminal window you can display commands sent to and received from the camera display internal commands program user buttons and send remote commands t
81. 0 to 144x144 not including the quiet zone Other symbols may be rectangular with sizes from 8x8 to 16x48 not including quiet zone All ECC 200 symbols can be recognized by the upper right corner being light dark For an image of reversed polarity it will be dark Complete attributes of ECC 200 symbols are provided in the AIM and ISO Creating a Data Matrix For demonstration purposes you can create your own Data Matrix from the Microscan website 1 From your web browser connect to http www microscan com CreateBarCodes aspx You will see a screen similar to the one displayed in Figure D 7 FIGURE D 7 Creating a Data Matrix MICROSCAN ZS SMe Contact us Industry Solutions Products Training amp Res I Welcome to Microscan s Online Bar Code Generator Create Bar Codes This application will allow you to generate sample linear bar codes and 2D symbols for testing Please note that Microscan implies no guarantee for any code created with this web site Step 1 Choose the type of bar code you wish to generate and click Next Step Step 2 The next page will contain additional parameters needed to generate the bar code or symbol Data Matrix Code 39 Code 39 Extended Interleaved 2 of 5 Code 11 Site Map Email Us Privacy Stat 9 5 lt UPCA Industrial 2 of 5 MAT 2 of 5 Code 93 EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC E Code 128 Planet PostNet
82. 009b FAR 0x55d37dbc CPSR 0x600000d3 flsh Display System Flash Size The flsh command dynamically sizes system flash by loading a piece of code into memory and vectoring to it so that it can query the flash ID register Syntax gt gt flsh Flash size 0x00400000 4194304 bytes ram Display System RAM Size The ram command displays the size of system RAM by writing unique data patterns to all address boundaries and checking where word wrap is detected Syntax gt gt ram RAM size 0 02000000 gt 33554432 bytes cach I Cache Control The cach command controls the state 1 on 0 off of the system instruction cache Syntax gt gt cach state File Transfer and Execute The file transfer and execute utility downloads a program over the serial link places it in RAM and jumps it This utility represents a combination of the old download and execute commands 6 12 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Diagnostic Test Menu r Reset Unit The command resets the unit via software reset Syntax gt gt r j Jump to Application The j command jumps to the application code Syntax gt 57 5 e Display Last Logged Error The e command displays the last error logged by the bootloader diagnostics Syntax gt gt e h Display Command Help The h command displays help for each of the comman
83. 08 A External Lighting Mounting Options Table 2 contains working distances and fields of view with various extensions and lenses TABLE 2 Working Distance and Fields of View r xX Extension 8 12 16 25 35 50 75 gt Lens Focal Length mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm I Horiz FOV mm 5 0 108 91 81 38 36 36 28 Camera Face Distance mm 203 248 305 234 328 495 582 Horiz FOV mm 5 5 41 44 51 28 43 33 26 Camera Face Distance mm 94 140 197 201 297 460 561 Horiz FOV mm 6 0 28 34 38 29 29 32 25 Camera Face Distance mm 74 107 157 193 282 439 546 Horiz FOV mm 10 0 9 13 14 17 21 20 Camera Face Distance mm 56 75 118 197 333 461 Horiz FOV mm 15 0 7 9 11 14 15 Camera Face Distance mm 61 94 159 269 395 Horiz FOV mm 20 0 6 9 11 13 Camera Face Distance mm 87 144 232 357 Notes Lens focus ring adjusted to close position Lens focus ring at mid point position External Lighting Mounting Options HawkEye M Light Mount Assembly HELTMA Brackets HELTMA I1S thru HELTMA 4S Short 6 5 inches 165 1mm HELTMA 1L thru HELTMA 4L Long 8 5 inches 215 9mm 5 30 Degree outrigger bracket HELTMA 6 30 Degree outrigger assembly Adjustable brackets simplify mounting for Microscan NER lights DOAL 25 DOAL 50 DF 150 3 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual A 3 A
84. 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 I O Operations 4 Reader can assert DV again only after an additional signal duration time TABLE 3 4 Two Line Multiplex of Verification Results Line Keyword Name State Good Poor Good On On Fair On Off Poor Off On 3 Fail Off Off DV 3Line Verify Pulse The Data Valid Pipelined Mode drives the Good Fair and Poor lines when the results of the verification are completed see Table 3 5 for the line states of Good Fair Poor and Fail This mode then drives the Data Valid line for the pre determined duration to indicate that the Good Fair and Poor lines are valid and stable The line will be set to the polarity for an indicated duration You can configure the duration of the signal by using the IO MODE command 15 2 T oz me x2 Go rw v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 3 29 Chapter Trigger Acquire Decode Present Good Fair Poor DV HawkEye 1500 Series Overview FIGURE 3 14 DV 3 Line Verify Pulse assert negate time time Notes 1 User asserts Trigger user can re trigger after acquisition is complete 2 When read is complete reader sets the Good Fair Poor Fail state and asserts DV after 2 ms set up time 3 Reader negates DV after user programmed signal duration time new decode can start 4 Reader can assert DV again only after an additional sign
85. 120 Configuring the Part Queue 4 120 Uploading Images Using QueueView 4 126 Saving Images to the PC Using QueueView 4 128 Saving the Current Image 4 129 Loading Image Files to the Camera 4 129 Returning the Camera to Acquisition 4 130 The Filmstrip Recorder 4 131 Reading Difficult Symbols 5 1 General Reading Guidelines 5 1 Further Explanation 5 1 Preprocessing with Morphology 5 2 Erode Example 5 3 Dilate Example 5 4 Reading Different Difficult Symbols 5 5 The Bootloader 6 1 Diagnostic Levels 6 1 Diagnostic Monitor 6 1 Boot Loader Power On Self Tests 6 3 Hard Error 6 3 Bootloader Menu 6 3 d Dump Memory 6 4 Syntax 6 4 m Modify Memory 6 5 Syntax 6 5 dt Display Test Menu 6 5 Syntax 6 5 et Execute Test 6 6 Syntax 6 6 dbp Display Boot Parameters 6 6 Syntax 6 6 mbp Modify Boot Parameters 6 7 Standalone Mode 6 7 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 APPENDIX A Contents Syntax 6 7 Manufacturing Mode 6 8 dm Display Menu 6 9 Syntax 6 9 dfb Display Flash Blocks 6 10 Syntax 6 10 der Display Ethernet Registers 6 10 Syntax 6 10 wmr Write MAC Register 6 11 Syntax 6 11 wpr Write PHY Register 6 11 Syntax 6 11 cpu Display CPU Registers 6 11 Syntax 6 11 flsh Display System Flash Size 6 12 Syntax 6 12 ram Display System RAM Size 6 12 Syntax 6 12 cach Control 6 12 Syntax 6 12 x File Transfer and Execute 6 12 r
86. 15 Growth lt 15 if 21 lt Growth lt 21 C if 26 Growth lt 26 D if 30 lt Growth lt 30 F if Growth is lt 30 or Growth gt 30 Contrast The difference in reflectance measured by grayscale values between the light and dark cells of the symbol It is measured according to the AIM specification The arithmetic mean of the darkest 10 of the pixels and that of the lightest 10 pixels within the Data Matrix area are computed The Symbol Contrast is the difference of the two means divided by the full gray scale range The Symbol Contrast Grade is given as A if contrast is gt 70 B if contrast is gt 55 C if contrast is gt 40 D if contrast is gt 20 F if contrast is 2096 UEC Unused Error Correction A Data Matrix symbol has fixed error correction capacity When a Data Matrix is decoded the Error Correction used indicates how much of the error correction capability is consumed in order to decode the symbol The more the error correction is used the less the Unused Error Correction is left within the error correction capacity which corresponds to the poorer print quality of the symbol The grade maximum is 1 0 is A if UEC gt 0 62 B if UEC gt 0 50 C if UEC gt 0 37 D if UEC gt 0 25 F if UEC lt 0 25 Axial NU The Axial Nonuniformity measures how different the average spacing between the center of adjacent cells in horizontal axis is from that of vertical axis
87. 2 DF3 DF4 DF5 DF6 DF7 4 80 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 TABLE 4 10 UII CPN with Data Fields Using ReadRunner Example Ull 12345678 Content of Decoded Data Matrix UII CPN DFO Valid UII data Constructed UII type Example Contruct_1 Example Ull 12345678 LBN 87654321 Valid CPN CPN CPN data Constructed CPN type Example CPN 87654321 Example PNR Valid LBN LBN LBN_data Constructed LBN type Example LBN 87654321 Example 30T Valid UII amp CPN UII UII data CPN CPN data Constructed UII CPN type Example Ull 12345678 CPN 87654321 Example Construct 1 PNR 7 UII UII data LBN LBN data Constructed UII LBN type Valid Ull amp LBN Example Construct 1 30T Valid UII amp Invalid CPN Valid UII amp Invalid LBN data 30 ERROR xxxx UIEUIL data PNR ERROR xxxx data 240 ERROR xxxx UIEUIL data 30T ERROR xxxx Constructed UII type Example Construct 1 Invalid amp Valid CPN Invalid UII amp Valid LBN UII ERROR xxxx CPN CPN data UII ERROR xxxx LBN LBN data Constructed CPN type 30P PNR 240 Constructed LBN type 30T 240 ERROR xxxx 30T ERROR xxxx 15434 ERROR xxxx Invalid UII ERROR xxxx Original decoded data 15434 ERROR xxxx Example UII ERROR DATA ELEMENT CHARACTER Invalid CPN ERROR xxxx Original decoded data PNR ERROR xxxx Invalid LBN Invalid amp In
88. 20 00 30 0 1 1801 0000 0000 0000 0000 0004 PKTNUM FIFO PTR 1 DATA2 ERCV Bank 3 3332 MCASTO 0000 8000 MCAST2 0000 8080 MCAST4 0000 0000 MCAST6 0000 01a4 MMI 3332 01a4 REV 3391 001 6 10 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Bootloader Menu wmr Write MAC Register The wmr command writes value to an Ethernet MAC register offset from bank Syntax gt gt wmr bank register value gt gt wmr 0 4 8000 t sets the software reset bit wpr Write PHY Register The wpr command writes value to an Ethernet PHY register Syntax gt gt wpr register value gt gt 0 400 t puts the PHY in internal loopback cpu Display CPU Registers The cpu command displays the contents of CPU registers Syntax gt gt cpu emory Registers 0xa0000000 0x0491b255 500 9 CASO1 Oxaaaaaaaa O CAS02 Oxaaaaaaaa SCO OxfffcAT774 Ox4115fffc 0x0d280d28 REFR 0x02300151 CAS20 0x1861861f CAS21 Oxfff86186 CAS22 Oxffffffff SC2 Oxfffc4111 SMCNFG 0x00000000 o o Coprocessor 15 Registers ID 0x6901b119 CTRL 0x00000270 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 6 11 Chapter The Bootloader 0x3f6d8000 DAC 0x76cdda44 FSR 0x0000
89. 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 2 7 Chapter Connecting to the HawkEye 1500 Field I O Connector Figure 2 5 shows the pinout for the HDB 15S connector FIGURE 2 5 Field I O HDB 15S Connector 110 15 ce e 19 eo e Table 2 7 lists the suppliers for the field I O HDB 15S mating connector TABLE 2 7 Field I O HDB 15S Mating Connector Suppliers Supplier Part Number HECONNIO Housing and Hood Kit 748676 1 Housing HEIL 180 015 102 001 Hood Table 2 8 describes the field I O signals TABLE 2 8 Field I O Signals S W Pin Signal Direction H W Description Direction S W Name Notes 6 sensor power out Fused 24V 100 ma 1 max 10 sensor power common DC ground 1 return 1 optoina in Trigger input A In OPTO IN 1 2 6 11 opto in b in Trigger input B In OPTO IN 1 2 6 2 opto 1 outa out Pass output a out OPTO OUT 3 7 PASS 12 opto 1 out b out Pass output b out OPTO OUT 3 7 PASS 3 opto 2 out a out Fail output a out OPTO OUT FAIL 3 8 13 opto 2 out b out Fail output b out OPTO OUT FAIL 3 8 4 opto 3 out a out Data valid a out OPTO OUT DV 3 9 2 8 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Field I O Connector TABLE 2 8 Field I O Signals Continued 14 opto 3 out b out Data valid b out OPTO OUT DV 3 9 2 5 TTL IO 1 In out General purpose out LIGH
90. 3 18 PID List 4 50 4 51 Index 8 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 extended 4 51 with acquire 4 50 4 51 4 52 PID 4 77 Pinout power connector 2 5 Pixels per Cell 4 107 Polarity 4 103 4 106 4 117 4 118 Port Number 49093 2 2 49094 2 2 49095 2 2 4 120 49096 2 2 49097 2 2 49098 2 2 3 31 4 72 49099 2 2 4 73 49100 2 2 4 74 49101 2 2 4 75 Position Enhance Enabled 4 115 Power connector pinout 2 5 signals 2 5 LEDs 2 42 strobe 3 5 4 49 strobe amp ext 4 49 supply wiring 2 6 Preferences setting 4 44 Preprocessing Images 4 24 Presentation Mode 3 4 4 48 Probe direction 4 108 4 113 speed 4 109 threshold 4 109 Program User Buttons Button 4 92 Q Qualifier configure part queue window 4 121 Questions frequently asked B 1 QueueView 4 126 QuicSet Symbol Photometry 3 35 Quiet Zone D 5 Index R r Command 6 13 ram Command 6 12 Rate Information displaying 4 94 Rates image 4 44 report 4 44 Read rate 4 16 timeout 4 52 4 107 4 111 READ A 4 60 READ B 4 61 READ C 4 61 READ D 4 61 Reader Programming samples B 8 trouble reading data matrix D 13 ReadRunner ini 4 89 buttons 4 6 keys 4 4 main window 4 2 menus 4 2 setting up communications 4 1 version number 4 98 Reads Min 4 16 READY 4 60 Rear Panel Layout 2 4 Record Images to Disk 4 132 Rectangular Symbols D 11 Reed Solomon Code D 5 Reflectance Reversal D 11 Refresh network button 4 97 part
91. 3 8 thick vs 1 4 thick for the standard block 2 Allows a HawkEye 1510 to mount in the same location when upgrading an HawkEye 10 3 Allows HawkEye 1515 to mount in the same location when upgrading an HawkEye 15 Note Do not insulate the mounting block The bottom of the HawkEye gets hot and metal to metal contact is necessary for heat dissipation Refer to Appendix E Specifications for mounting block dimensions Optional Location for Mounting Block Figure 2 46 shows the optional locations for the mounting block on the HawkEye 1500 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 2 47 Chapter Connecting to the HawkEye 1500 FIGURE 2 46 Optional Location for Mounting Block 1515 Shown e pawkey E HOLE LOCATION FOR OPTIONAL MOUNTING BLOCK LOCATION Ep x 0 64mm 7 025 19 05mm 750 41 91mm 50 80MM 1 650 2 000 Remove the two hole covers before installing mounting block in one of the two optional mounting locations as shown in Figure 2 46 A HawkEye 1515 is shown Use 4 40 x 5 16 pan head screws Using longer screws may damage the HawkEye 1500 2 48 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 cnaptens 1500 Series Overview The chapter contains an overview of HawkEye 1500 Series Smart Came
92. 31 20 45 0 23 38 22 22 20x20 1 1 60 43 28 40 0 20 34 24 24 22x22 1 1 72 52 34 40 0 20 35 26 26 24 24 1 1 88 64 42 38 9 19 35 32 32 14x14 4 1 124 91 60 36 7 18 34 36 36 16x16 4 1 172 127 84 32 8 16 30 40 40 18x18 4 1 228 169 112 29 6 15 28 44 44 20x20 4 1 288 214 142 28 0 14 27 D 8 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Data Matrix TABLE D 4 ECC 200 Symbol Attributes Continued 48 48 22x22 4 1 348 259 172 28 1 14 27 52 52 24x24 4 2 408 304 202 29 2 15 27 64 64 14x14 16 2 560 418 277 28 6 14 27 72 72 16x16 16 4 736 550 365 28 1 14 26 80 80 18x18 16 4 912 682 453 29 6 15 28 88 88 20x20 16 4 1152 862 573 28 0 14 27 96 96 22x22 16 4 1392 1042 693 28 1 14 27 104 104 24x24 16 6 1632 1222 813 29 2 15 28 120 120 18x18 36 6 2100 1573 1047 28 0 14 27 132 132 20x20 36 8 2608 1954 1301 27 6 14 26 144 144 22x22 36 8 3116 2335 1555 28 5 14 27 D Rectangular Symbols 5 8 18 6x16 1 1 10 6 3 58 3 25 o 8 32 6x14 2 1 20 13 8 52 4 24 E 12 26 10x24 1 1 32 22 14 46 7 23 37 gt 12 36 10 16 2 1 44 31 20 45 0 23 38 16 36 14 16 2 1 64 46 30 42 9 21 38 16 48 14x22 2 1 98 72 47 36 4 18 32 Note 1 Symbol size does include a quiet zone Note 2 The Data Capacity value for alphanumeric mode can be larger when some numeric numbers are together and smaller when the upper and lowercase alpha
93. 500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Fine Tuning amp Monitoring Your Application FIGURE 4 81 Configure Part Queue Window Configure Part Queue Part Queue On Off On Qualifier Specific Failure All Maximum Records 0 Capacity 29 Save Method Host IP Save Results txt Yes Save Images Yes Max FTP Records 3 Specify parameters from the following pull down menus Part Queue On Off Enables On or disables Off the part queue Qualifier Specifies what you want to store in the part queue All Passed Failed Verify Good Fair Poor Failed Verify Good Fair Poor Verify Good Verify Fair Verify Poor Verify Failed z Failed m Cancel m Save on remote system m 10 2 1 144 Path etem 7 i c c gt tc tc v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 121 Chapter ReadRunner Verify Poor Failed e Verify Fair Poor Failed Specific Failure Specifies what kind of failures you want to store All Location Failure Decode Failure Match Failure e Runtime Error Note This field is activated when you select Failed for the Qualifier parameter Maximum Records Specifies the maximum number of images you want to store in the part queue The approximate limit will be displayed next to this field and depends on the amount of memory on the camera and th
94. 6ab 19 DE 3 12345 6 11 tw nn 4 123 56 12 5 123456BC 13 6 123456CD 14 7 123456DE 15 8 123 DE Note Wildcard characters are and r Serial Number Matching Enable Serial Number Matching Start Count 0 Increment 0 Character Positions First 1 Last 1 MatchList only replaces the single match string capabilities with multiple match string testing All other functions such as Serial Number Matching remain unaffected and may be used in conjunction with Match List c gt tc tc v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 37 Chapter ReadRunner FIGURE 4 29 Match Index for Text Reporting configure Formatted Output Standard 2 TCP3 TCP4 Enabled Header Trailer Decode Pass DATAJNDDNDA Decode Fail Locate Fail MatchPass Code Matched INDEX NODXDA Match Fail ba RT Error DATA DATAHEX PID TIMESTAMP DETAILED VERI GRADE VERI DETAIL VERI FORMATTED VERI STATUS VERI 1 IAQG ANGLE CHECKSUM New line Od 0a MATCH_INDEX Data Fields MATCH INDEX has been added if you require text output instead of or in addition to Digital I O output MATCH INDEX can be displayed in reports graphic overlays and as Digital I O as shown in Figure 4 30 through Figure 4 32 4 38 HawkEye 1500 Series
95. 8 Contents Retry Modes 4 49 Extended PID List 4 51 Read Timeout 4 52 Report Budget 4 52 Triggers 4 53 Advanced I O 4 54 Supported Keyword Names 4 59 Supported Behaviors 4 61 Serial TCP Settings 4 64 Ethernet IP Connectivity 4 67 Output Format Strings 4 71 Format String Keywords 4 77 Keyword Example 4 82 Toggling the Target Laser 4 86 Toggling the Beeper 4 87 Controlling the Beep 4 88 Saving Parameters on the Camera to Flash 4 89 Restoring Defaults 4 89 Decoder 4 89 Application Mode 4 89 Decoder amp Application Mode 4 90 Displaying 4 90 Verification Report 4 90 Reports amp Images Over A Serial Connection 4 91 Commands Sent To and Output From the Camera 4 91 Programming User Buttons 4 92 Sending Remote Commands to the Camera 4 94 Timing amp Rate Information 4 94 Information About Cameras on the Network 4 96 ReadRunner Version Number 4 98 Fine Tuning amp Monitoring Your Application 4 100 Selecting Symbologies 1D or 2D 4 100 Camera Resolution and Pixels 4 100 Learning amp Unlearning 4 101 Enabling Assisted Learn 4 103 Unlearning 4 103 Modifying Decoding Parameters 4 104 Data Matrix Parameters 4 104 Barcode Parameters 4 109 Expert Settings 4 113 Data Matrix Fine Tune 4 115 BC412 Parameters 4 116 QR Code Parameters 4 117 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual ix Contents CHAPTER 5 CHAPTER 6 Code 39 Parameters 4 118 I20f5 Parameters 4 119 UPC Parameters 4 119 Debugging Images 4
96. 9 4 56 E e Command 6 13 ECC 000 140 D 5 D 7 D 10 D 11 200 D 5 D 8 D 10 D 11 D 12 level 4 106 D 6 EIA D 1 Electronics Industries Association D 1 Enable assisted learn 4 103 barcodes 4 26 4 112 data matrix 4 26 Encoding Schemes data matrix D 7 file formats D 8 format strings D 7 ERODE Method 4 25 Error Correction codes D 5 data matrix D 5 et Command 6 6 Index Ethernet LEDs 2 42 Ethernet IP 4 67 Execute Test Command 6 6 Exposure 4 23 Extended channel interpretations D 11 pid list 4 51 External 3 5 4 49 i o terminal block adapter 2 27 cable 2 34 lighting 3 6 F F12 4 90 4 96 F7 4 19 F8 4 20 F9 4 129 Fail Color 4 46 Failed network overview window 4 97 FAQs B 1 Field i o connector 2 8 of view 1 4 File formats D 8 menu Ctrl I 4 129 4 130 Ctrl S 4 89 Ctrl Z 4 90 F7 4 19 F8 4 20 F9 4 129 load configuration file to camera 4 20 load image files to camera 4 129 restore defaults 4 89 4 90 save camera configuration to file 4 19 save current image 4 129 save parameters on camera 4 89 use camera for acquisition 4 130 transfer and execute command 6 12 Files loading configuration 4 20 saving configuration 4 19 Filmstrip Recorder Window 4 131 Finder Pattern D 11 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual Index 5 Index misalignment 4 118 First Character Position 4 42 Flash save parameters on camera to 4 89 Flasher C 5 Flow Control 4 67 flsh Command 6 12 Font Button
97. 98 73mm 3 887 57 15mm 2 250 lL 93 98 7 3 700 28 58mm 1 125 200 di 22 23mm Bye L 875 E 44 45mm i 1 750 The HawkEye 1510 is designed for applications requiring flexibility in the selection of lighting and optics The unit is designed with a mounting block that allows the attachment of C and CS mount lenses Additionally it has brackets specially designed to mount a variety of the standard NER Lights For complete information about the HawkEye 1510 see Appendix A HawkEye 1510 Note The HawkEye 1510 does not have a laser v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 1 9 Chapter Configurations 1 10 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 N 2 Connecting to the HawkEye 1500 go gt Eo gt x c gt oS or The chapter contains information to help you connect to the HawkEye 1500 camera Specific information describes connectors adapters cables pinouts and signals Note There are no user serviceable parts inside Connectivity TCP IP Port When communicating over Ethernet the camera uses the following predefined ports The camera establishes connections as a Server and therefore listens for Host clients to initiate the connection on a particular port Any number of clients can connect to the camera each one with
98. A square Data Matrix with same number of rows and columns tends to look like a rectangular matrix if Axial Nonuniformity is sgnificant This is measured according to AIM specification Axial Nonuniformity is graded as v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 17 it o c c gt oc Chapter ReadRunner A if AN lt 0 06 B if AN lt 0 08 Cif AN lt 0 10 Dif AN lt 0 12 Fif AN gt 0 12 e Value The actual contrast value This is a numeric value Resetting Camera Report Statistics You can reset the camera statistics that are displayed in the Camera Report window Figure 4 10 and at the bottom of ReadRunner s main window To reset the statistics on camera X 1 Select Reset Statistics from the Settings menu 2 Click Yes when asked if you wish to control camera X 3 Click Yes when asked if you want to reset the camera statistics ReadRunner resets the statistics in the Camera Report window and in the main ReadRunner window Saving amp Loading Configuration Files A configuration file contains specific commands for reading a symbol Once you have the settings you want you can save them to the PC and later reload them to the same camera or to another camera Save Camera Configuration To File saves the entire registry to an HCF text based configuration file on you PC This information includes e Separate photometry for each PID All PID settings e
99. Appendix HawkEye 1510 TABLE A 3 HawkEye Light Mount Assembly Brackets Continued Part Numbers Description HELTMA 4L Adjustment range 156 7mm 6 17 HELTMA 4S Adjustment range 100 1mm 3 94 Compatible with NER Doal 50 V2 series Diffused On Axis Lights External Lighting Brackets for Off Axis Lights HELTMA 5 30 Degree outrigger bracket Compatible with NER AR 50 9 Pin D series Area Array llluminators and BL 50 9 Pin D series Backlights HELTMA 6 30 Degree outrigger assembly Includes HE1515 Bright Field Light Requires external 12 volt power supply compatible with NER 010 502400 US cord 010 502500 EU cord power supplies Power for Lights Options External Independent Power Internal Power Connector A Continuous 12v 0 5 e DOAL 25 DOAL 50 DF100 1 ONLY Strobe Use external power and strobe modules e When LIGHTING EXTERNAL is selected TTL O P 1 Pin 5 becomes Strobe Trigger A 6 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 gt Lighting Connector Do not exceed 0 5 amp continuous current draw or you may damage the HawkEye 1500 LO z 2 x gt I Lighting Connector For complete information about the Light Port Connector see Light Port Connector on page 2 45 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual A 7 Appendix HawkEye 1510 A 8 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manua
100. Application FIGURE 4 68 Partial Data Matrix Image SEE VIEW A EQUALS ONE lt PIXEL VIEW A The X dimension which refers to the narrowest bar and narrowest space must consist of at least 2 pixels In the case of a linear or stacked barcode the minimum pixel width applies to the X dimension as shown in Figure 4 69 FIGURE 4 69 X Dimension F X dimension X dimension tc tc Learning amp Unlearning A learn sequence narrows down the parameters associated with a symbol resulting in a more reliable decode of the same type of symbol In most cases learning speeds up the decoding time Learn Photometry Locks in the exposure and gain settings and speeds up image acquisition Learn Decoder Settings Locks the Data Matrix size polarity etc and speeds up decoding Otherwise the camera looks for all types of symbols Once a learn sequence is initiated all symbols that the HawkEye 1500 camera reads must be of the same type and size in order to be decoded To display the Learn window 1 Click Take Control v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 101 Chapter ReadRunner 2 Click Yes when asked if you wish to control camera X 3 Click Lean ReadRunner displays one of the thr Learn windows shown in Figure 4 70 Note Notice how the text changes for each button depending on t
101. B 10 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 aemewoxc Upgrading Camera Software This appendix describes how to upgrade the HawkEye 1500 Series Smart Camera Based Reader s software using either HawkEye Flasher or the HawkEye bootloader i 65 9 Og Pz o i Note In this chapter we use specific camera and software version numbers as an example Please use the latest HawkEye software available and substitute in your version numbers in the procedures Overview The HawkEye 1500 uses Flash memory to store a series of binary images that are executed when the camera starts up These images include Bootloader Simple menu driven interface that examines Flash memory and downloads and executes SEC files via the serial port e FPGA Binary image that drives the image acquisition hardware BootParams Binary image that sets up networking and other persistent parameters Registry Binary image used for all decoder acquisition and serial communication parameters vxWorks Kernel The camera operating system itself v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual C 1 Appendix Kel Upgrading Camera Software Caution While the versions of vx Works kernel and Bootloader should be kept the same by downloading both downloading the registry will wipe out customer configurations and should be used only when t
102. Currently active PID in the JOB e Whether the JOB should be restored on reboot The following items are excluded from the list of saved configuration items DHCPEX 4 18 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Setting Up Your Application DOMAIN EIPENABLE IP e MACADDR TARGET e TTY Note The order of execution is important to ensure that PIDs are created before they may be used in a JOB related command Saving Configuration Files To save the current camera configuration file 1 Press F7 or select Save Camera Configuration To File from the File menu ReadRunner displays the Select Configuration File window as shown in Figure 4 11 FIGURE 4 11 Select Configuration File Window Saving Select Configuration File Save in Cy ReadRunner x EJ peN c gt tc tc Save as type HawkEye Configuration Files Cancel My Network P 2 Selecta location where you want to save the configuration file and click Save v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 19 Chapter ReadRunner Loading Configuration Files To load a configuration file to a camera 1 Press F8 or select Load Configuration File To Camera from the File menu 2 Click Yes when asked if you wish to control camera X ReadRunner displays the Select Configuration File window as shown in
103. D 4 ECC 200 Symbol Attributes on page D 8 Data characters per symbol refers to maximum symbol size in ECC 200 Alphanumeric data up to 2335 characters 8 bit byte data 1555 characters Numeric data 3116 digits Selectable error correction ECC 000 140 Four levels of convolutional error correction plus the option to apply only error detection ECC 200 Reed Solomon error correction Code type Matrix Orientation independence Yes D 10 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Data Matrix Summary of Additional Features Symbol Structure The following summarizes additional Data Matrix features including whether it is inherent to the Data Matrix or optional Reflectance reversal Inherent Symbols are intended to be read when marked such that the image is either dark on light or light on dark Extended Channel Interpretations ECC 200 only optional This mechanism enables characters from other character sets e g Arabic Cyrillic Greek Hebrew and other data interpretations or industry specific requirements to be represented Rectangular symbols ECC 200 only optional Six symbol formats are specified in a rectangular form Structured append ECC 200 only optional This allows files of data to be represented in up to 16 Data Matrix symbols The original data can be correctly reconstructed regardless of the order in which the symbols are scanned Each Data Mat
104. DE SOLDER SIDE 2 40 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Ethernet Table 2 18 describes the signals for the serial connector and serial cable TABLE 2 18 Serial Connector mini DIN 8 Serial Adapter Cable DB9S N DB9 Pin Mini DIN 8 Pin RS232 Signal Direction Description gt 1 nc mu Camerdeet 2 3 TXD out Transmit data 9 2 3 4 RXD in Receive data 4 n c DTR n u Data terminal ready 8 En 5 7 8 Gnd Common Signal ground 2 6 n c DSR n u Data set ready 5 5 7 6 CTS in Clear to send 8 5 RTS out Ready to send 9 n c RI n u Ring indicator Shell Shell Shell Common Chassis ground Note 1 Mini DIN 8 pins 1 amp 2 are not connected Ethernet Figure 2 39 shows the pinout for the RJ45 Ethernet connector FIGURE 2 39 RJ45 Ethernet Connector 1 8 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 2 41 Chapter Connecting to the HawkEye 1500 Table 2 19 describes the Ethernet connector signals TABLE 2 19 RJ45 Ethernet Connector Signals Pin Ethernet Signal Ethernet TX Ethernet TX Ethernet RX Ethernet RX CO NISJA Power amp Ethernet LEDs Figure 2 40 shows the rear panel power and Ethernet LEDs FIGURE 2 40 Rear Panel Power amp Ethernet LEDs Camera Power On LED ETHERNET Ethernet LINK LED
105. Default Settings If you have problems reading or decoding a symbol it could be because the system is set up with a learned Data Matrix The system may have been configured to read a specific type of symbol one that does not match the characteristics of the provided symbols or the one you may have created yourself If you do not have access to ReadRunner you can open up the decoder to read almost any symbol by depressing the QuicSet button on the back of the camera for 3 to 4 seconds For more information see the section titled QuicSet Decoder Factory Defaults in the HawkEye 1500 Series Quick Start Guide Samples of Reader Programming Data Matrices Setting Serial Communications pr 2 TTY 2400 8 1 TTY 9600 8 1 TTY 115200 8 1 8 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Trouble Reading Setting Triggers B TRIG T TRIG C BB Resetti 22 esetting 34 o gt m T cE is ot RESET DECODER RESET APPMODE RESET FACTORY 3 Setting Targeting RE TARGET OFF TARGET ON Setting Beeper BEEP N BEEP Y Setting Illumination ILLUM OFF ILLUM ON ILLUM STROBE Resetting ROI ER ROI RESET v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual B 9 Appendix Troubleshooting amp Frequently Asked Questions Setting Learn Unlearn LEARN UNLEARN Setting Photometry PHOTO MAN PHOTO AUTO Saving SAV Setting DHCP DHCP Y DHCP N
106. E keyword name rang E FAILURE if the measured angle is less than 345 and greater than 15 The deviation value may be 09 MAX MIN If the keyword name s value is within the range of a maximum value to a minimum value the line is turned OFF Otherwise the line is turned ON This is an alternate behavior for ANGLE FAILURE 4 62 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner FIGURE 4 46 I O Assignment Window MAX MIN Behavior jhawkeye1500 CTRL IO Assignment Delay Latch PID o o o OPTO_OUT1 v High True PASS Boor 7 OPTO_OUT2 High True FAIL poor OUT3 v High True pv poor GPIO_OUT1 v High True GPIO OUT2 Max Min High True ANGLE FAILURE MIN 350 jis GPIO OUT3 High True RTE poor GPIO_OUT4 High True i o gt tc tc When used with the ANGLE FAILURE keyword name the MAX MIN behavior understands that angles are in t he range of 0 through 359 The example in Figure 4 46 will consider that there is an ANGLE FAILURE if the measured 350 and greater than 15 MAX value equal range is desired and the measured angle must be equal to a angle is less than ls MIN value if no single value Otherwise the
107. ERI AIMDPM DATA OD 0A in Figure 4 54 ReadRunner displays the Output setting window shown in Figure 4 54 FIGURE 4 54 Output Settings Window S HawkEyeE01B56 CTRL Terminal 5 Inthe Decode Pass text box type VERI FORMATTED 4 82 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner 6 Click Apply and OK 7 Fromthe Settings menu click Symbology and Verification to display the Symbology Verification window 8 Select AIM ISO 16022 9 Click Apply and OK 10 From the Windows menu click Terminal Window 11 Click the Display Report Output From Camera button You will see a screen containing information similar to the following FIGURE 4 55 Decode Pass Text Box Contains VERI FORMATTED 012245 06 2 CG 3 56 nG 4 n 6 61 GPG 2 PGx 6 14 PGY 6 24 GUEC 3 B 86 06 2 CG 3 56 nG 4 n 6 61 GPG 2 PGx 6 16 PGY 6 25 GUEC 3 B 86 b gt oc tc 12 If you replace VERI FORMATTED with VERI DETAIL in the Decode Pass text box of the Output Setting window the output would look similar to the following FIGURE 4 56 Decode Pass Text Contains VERI DETAIL 5 1 2 4 5 235335565458 615256 1756 25535 86 6 59 1 3 56 5 08 01 1 0 18 0 26 1 136 0 360 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 83 Chapter ReadRunner Finally you can also customize the number of
108. Figure 4 12 FIGURE 4 12 Select Configuration File Window Look in ResdRumner rex E3 Camera Binaries Configuration Files Images Manuals My Documents My Computer 3 File name m Open ws Files of type Hawke ye Configuration Files Cancel My Network P T Open read only 2 3 Double click on the Configuration Files folder 4 Select the configuration file and click Open ReadRunner displays a window similar to the in Figure 4 13 and loads the configuration file to the camera 4 20 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Setting Up Your Application FIGURE 4 13 Select Configuration File Window Loading Loading Hawkeye Configuration File 1 2 Lines loaded 0 errors reported Releasing Control of a Camera To release control of a camera 1 Click Release tc tc ReadRunner releases control of the camera currently selected Removing a Camera When you are finished using a camera and want to disconnect and remove it use the following procedure 1 De select the button of the camera you want to remove Note A button is de selected when its background is blue 2 Right click on the button of the camera you want to remove 3 Highlight Remove Button 4 Click Remove Button ReadRunner removes the camera from the main ReadRunner window v2 4
109. GURE 3 7 Data Valid Pipelined Mode Trigger Acquire Decode Present time time Pass Fail DV in 2 T2 L go x IO Notes 1 User asserts Trigger user can re trigger after acquisition is complete 2 When read is complete reader sets Pass Fail and asserts DV after 2 ms set up time 3 Reader negates DV after user programmed signal duration time new decode can start 4 Reader can assert DV again only after an additional signal duration time Pass Fail Only Pipelined Note The discussion of pin pairs assumes a default assignment of the I O lines The Pass Fail Only Pipelined Mode drives pin pair 2 12 when the results of the Decode are a success and at the same time drives pin pair 3 13 to the opposite v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 3 21 Chapter Trigger Acquire Decode Present Pass Fail HawkEye 1500 Series Overview direction When the results of the Decode are a failure it drives pin pair 3 13 and at the same time drives pin pair 4 14 to the opposite direction The line will be set to the polarity for an indicated duration You can configure the duration of the signal by using the IO MODE command Figure 3 8 depicts a Trigger occurring which initiates an Image acquisition which in turn is passed on to the Decoder for analysis Once the outcome is determined the Pass or Fail is presented on the
110. General Purpose 9 General Purpose 4 10 24 volt return Ground 11 Sensor Input B 12 Opto Output 1 B 13 Opto Output 2 B 14 Opto Output 3 B 15 Return Ground Shell Chassis Ground Signal Distribution Terminal Block Figure 2 24 shows the Signal Distribution Terminal Block 2 28 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 External I O Terminal Block Adapter Optional FIGURE 2 24 Signal Distribution Terminal Block Terminal Block TSR Chassis Ground N General Purpose I O 3 1 Ground General Purpose I O 2 T 14 Opto Output 3 B 24 volts 1 3 Opto Output 2 B go o OE zo p x 6 5 or 4 2 Opto Output 1 B 8 7 6 General Purpose I O 1 or Strobe 5 Opto Output 3A 4 11 Sensor Input B OptoOuput2A 3 10 Ground OptoOutput1A 2 7 9 General Purpose 4 Sensor 1 TABLE 2 15 Pinout Signal Distribution Terminal Block 2 5 Description Sensor Input A Opto Output 1 A Opto Output 2 A Opto Output 3 A General Purpose I O 1 or Strobe 24 volts General Purpose I O 2 General Purpose General Purpose 4 24 volt return Ground Sensor Input B 0O CO NI OD oO wo DM O v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 2 29 Chapter Connecting to the HawkEye 1500 TABLE 2 15
111. HawkEye 1515 the HawkEye 1525 and the HawkEye 1510 When information is specific to a camera that camera name is used Selecting the Correct HawkEye to Read Your Data Matrix There are three main HawkEye models v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 1 1 Chapter Configurations FIGURE 1 1 HawkEye 1515 MICROSCAN 1 2 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 ul Selecting the Correct HawkEye to Read Your Data Matrix FIGURE 1 3 HawkEye 1510 o c 5 5 D 9 Both the HawkEye 1515 and HawkEye 1525 have fixed optics and illumination built right into the units The HawkEye 1510 allows you to select from a variety of off the shelf optics and illumination components For complete information about the HawkEye 1510 see Appendix A HawkEye 1510 The HawkEye 1515 and HawkEye 1525 use the same lenses which give the units a range of magnifications The HawkEye 1515 and HawkEye 1525 use different illumination components Use the following paragraphs to help you pick the correct model and magnification for your Data Matrix or Barcode reading application Data Matrix Construction A Data Matrix is made up of four major components as shown in Figure 1 4 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 1 3 Chapter Configurations FIGURE 1 4 Four Major Components of a Data M
112. I O lines for the desired duration FIGURE 3 8 Pass Fail Only Pipelined assert negate time time Notes 1 2 User asserts Trigger user can re trigger after acquisition is complete When read is complete reader sets either Pass or Fail Reader negates Pass or Fail after user programmed signal duration time new decode can start Reader can assert Pass or Fail again only after an additional signal duration time Data Valid Full Handshake Note The discussion of pin pairs assumes a default assignment of the I O lines 3 22 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 I O Operations The Data Valid Full Handshake Mode drives pin pair 2 12 when the results of the Decode are a success It drives the same line to the opposite direction when the results of the Decode are a failure It then drives pin pair 4 14 to indicate that pin pair 2 12 is valid and represents pass or fail The line will be set to the desired polarity and will stay at that polarity until the next trigger initiates a new acquisition Figure 3 9 depicts a Trigger occurring which initiates an Image acquisition which in turn is passed on to the Decoder for analysis Once the outcome is determined the Pass or Fail is presented on the I O line until the next trigger occurs FIGURE 3 9 Data Valid Full Handshake Trigger Acquire Decode in roe E lt
113. I ONLY for formatted output When this option 1s enabled the UII CPN data will be added to the formatted output based on the position of the keyword The UII CPN output has the following format UII CPN v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 79 Chapter ReadRunner TABLE 4 9 UII CPN Content of Decoded Data Matrix UII CPN Valid UII UIIUII data Example Ull 12345678 Valid CPN CPN CPN data Example CPN 87654321 Valid LBN LBN LBN data Example LBN 87654321 Valid amp CPN UII UII data CPN CPN data Example Ull 12345678 CPN 87654321 Valid UII amp LBN data LBN LBN data Example UlI 12345678 LBN 87654321 Valid UII amp invalid CPN Valid UII amp invalid UII UII data CPN ERROR Example Ull 12345678 CPN ERROR data ERROR Example UII 12345678 ERROR Invalid amp valid CPN Invalid UII amp valid LBN UII ERROR CPN CPN data Example UII ERROR 87654321 ERROR LBN LBN data Example UII ERROR LBN 87654321 None of the above Invalid UII Invalid CPN Invalid LBN Invalid UII amp Invalid CPN Invalid UII amp Invalid LBN No output data UII WITH INFO UII CPN with Data Fields be enabled with the keyword WITH INFO for formatted output When this option is enabled the output data corresponding to this keyword will have the following format UII CPN DF0 DF1 DF
114. ID Trigger Edge Latch and Delay settings are ignored on this line Intersymbol Wait When an Intersymbol Wait time is specified leaving a symbol under the camera will produce a single result A new result is produced only Ifthe same symbol data is NOT read for at least as long as the intersymbol wait period OR Ifa new symbol data is read PID List Allows each retry to use different decoder and preprocessing parameters without taking a new picture for each retry Up to 15 PIDs can be used 5 retries This mode retries in the order List 1 through List 15 and DOES NOT take a new picture each time Note See Extended PID List on page 4 51 PID List w Acquire Allows each retry to use different decoder and or preprocessing parameters while taking a new Picture for each retry Up to 15 PIDs can be used 5 retries This mode retries in the order List 1 through List 15 taking a new picture each time Note See Extended PID List on page 4 51 4 50 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner Light Allows up to 2 retries using optionally different Decoder parameters On the second retry a new picture is taken using the same photometry parameters however the lighting and or strobe mode can be specified directly in the UI This mode is a subset of the RETRY PID List w Acquire mode This mode retries in the order PIDO with Lighting ON and then PIDn with External Light
115. IMESTAMP This keyword return the time stamp of the trigger This expands to a date time string in GMT e g THU APR 03 15 42 52 2003 VERI 1 IAQG This keyword provides a DMx AutoID compatibility mode for the IAQG Verification 1 report This allows the HawkEye 1500 to be used as a drop in replacement for a DMX AutoID Verification 1 reporting in DMxAutoID v1 5 2 0236514397793412001 F 65 24 B 19 0 A 0 9 1 00 0236514397793412001 is the decoded string F 65 24 are Dot Size Grade Dot Size Countl Dot Size Count2 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 77 Chapter ReadRunner B 19 0 are Dot Center Grade DC Countl and DC Count2 A 0 9 are Angle of Distortion Grade and angle note representation of 0 9 1 00 is the Average cell fill note representation of 1 00 e VERI DETAIL This keyword return the detailed verification data separated by semicolons but only when Verification is enabled This data includes the overall grade grade contrast contrast grade axial number AIM axial non uniformity value grade print growth AIM print growth X AIM print growth Y grade error correction number of error bits and the UEC value e VERI FORMATTED This keyword returns the formatted verification data This is similar to VERI DETAIL but each value is identified by an acronym title and is separated by spaces VERI GRADE This keyword returns the overa
116. Identification which is fully described in the HawkEye 1500 Technical Note titled Jobs in the HawkEye 1500 This Technical Note is on your HawkEye 1500 Series CD v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 3 9 Chapter HawkEye 1500 Series Overview Each PID contains specific decoder settings for a given symbol The decoder takes the one image and attempts to decode the with the settings in the listed PID until the list ends or a successful decode occurs PID List w Acquire This mode behaves the same as PID List except that a new image is taken for each PID using the photometry settings in the PID being tested Light This retry mode allows a second lighting configuration to be tried while taking a second image This might be useful if some codes are printed on glossy backgrounds and others are matte backgrounds requiring a different lighting strategy Note When Verification is set to AIM DPM 1 2006 the Retry Mode will be disabled HawkEye 1500 I O Operations The HawkEye 1500 provides 9 discrete input output I O lines for your application These I O lines offer direct interaction between the HawkEye 1500 and the production environment via the HawkEye 1500 I O connector Trigger Behavior First some definitions e Delay The time after seeing the selected trigger edge until the camera image acquisition is started Latch The time after seeing the selected trigge
117. K v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 125 Chapter ReadRunner Uploading Images Using QueueView You can use ReadRunner to activate the Part Queue on the camera and save specific images inline with the running inspection You can save All images Passed images or Failed images decode failures locator failures match failures or runtime errors You can specify the number ofrecords to store the maximum is up tothe amount of memory on the camera Once images are stored on the camera you can use QueueView to pull them off the camera examine them and save them to disk To start QueueView and upload records 1 Select Start Programs ReadRunner 2 4 Utilities and finally HawkEye QueueView The QueueView window is displayed Figure 4 82 describes the QueueView options and buttons FIGURE 4 82 QueueView Window Save Images as Bitmap TIFFs Back Forward Clear the images from camera without uploading Upload Part Queue clear from camera jHawkEye QueueView dihawkeveT500 Verify Refresh Part Queue Information Save Current Image Save All Images List of Cameras Passed Cycles Decodes Located Matches Verify Total Good Fair Select Image Folder Timing ms Value Cycle Time Read Time Proc Time Acq Time Other Alarms Retries Gain Exp Photo 4 126 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Fine
118. MICROSCAN HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 EM 40391 1V241 Copyright and Disclaimer Copyright 2008 by Microscan Systems Inc 1201 S W 7th Street Renton WA U S A 98057 425 226 5700 FAX 425 226 8682 All rights reserved The information contained herein is proprietary and is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and or service Microscan manufactured equipment and is not to be released reproduced or used for any other purpose without written permission of Microscan Throughout this manual trademarked names might be used Rather than place a trademark TM symbol at every occurrence of a trademarked name we state herein that we are using the names only in an editorial fashion and to the benefit of the trademark owner with no intention of infringement Disclaimer The information and specifications described in this manual are subject to change without notice Latest Manual Version and Warranty Information For the latest version of this manual and warranty information visit our website at www microscan com Technical Support For technical support email helpdesk microscan com Microscan Systems Inc 1201 S W 7th Street Renton WA 98057 U S A Tel 425 226 5700 Fax 425 226 8250 helpdesk microscan com Microscan Europe Tel 31 172 423360 Fax 31 172 423366 Microscan Asia Pacific R O Tel 65 6846 1214 Fax 65 6846 4641 Microscan Limited Warranty Statem
119. MOUNTING RACK L1 L1 F O 1 0 DC DC SWITCH LOOP LOAD LOOP L2 SUPPLY L2 SUPPLY t t on OF OE Input DC 3 Output AC 5 INPUT OUTPUT USING USING STANDARD STANDARD MOUNTING RACK MOUNTING RACK This gives you access to a combination of up to 4 input or output modules 2 26 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 External I O Terminal Block Adapter Optional External I O Terminal Block Adapter Optional Figure 2 22 shows the I O external terminal block adapter N FIGURE 2 22 I O External Terminal Block Adapter go zo D zo L d Ox gt c 6 5 or External I O Terminal Block Connectors Interface Connector 15 Connector HDB Sub Figure 2 23 shows the pinout for the HDB 15S connector v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 2 27 Chapter Connecting to the HawkEye 1500 FIGURE 2 23 Field I O HDB 15S Connector 110 e O15 ce 1 e o e 5 TABLE 2 14 Pinout I O Interface Connector 15 Position HDB Sub Pin Description 1 Sensor Input A 2 Opto Output 1 A 3 Opto Output 2 A 4 Opto Output 3 A 5 General Purpose I O 1 or Strobe 6 24 volts 7 General Purpose 2 8
120. N OAR ON v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 2 19 Chapter Connecting to the HawkEye 1500 TABLE 2 13 Pinout General Purpose I O Terminal Block TB2 Pin Description G P Opto 1 Positive Terminal G P Opto 1 Negative Terminal G P Opto 2 Positive Terminal G P Opto 2 Negative Terminal G P Opto 3 Positive Terminal G P Opto 3 Negative Terminal G P Opto 4 Positive Terminal G P Opto 4 Negative Terminal CO NISJA Field I O Wiring Examples Input Opto Wiring Sample wiring diagrams for trigger input A and B opto input are located on terminal block TB1 positions 4 and 5 see Figure 2 14 and Figure 2 15 FIGURE 2 14 Input Opto Wiring Isolated NPN and PNP Sources NPN Source Camera PNP Source Camera 5 24V 5 24V j Signal T BE Ji Signal vA SR 2 20 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 I O Expansion Module Optional FIGURE 2 15 Input Opto Wiring Non Isolated NPN and PNP Sources NPN Source Camera PNP Source Camera 2 24 VDC Vcc 24 VDC Vcc Signal 1 w 1 YA H H Signal ze o
121. Network drops occur 12 Used by StopAndScan to signal retry duration Figure 2 6 shows the Opto In equivalent circuit FIGURE 2 6 Opto In 3 3V R SR IN _ 15K 2 2K lt R S 10K a D 11 IN B 2 2K Figure 2 7 shows the Opto Out equivalent circuit FIGURE 2 7 Opto Out R 3 3V WN OPTO OUT XA 330 H OPTO OUT XB Figure 2 8 shows the TTL I O equivalent circuit 2 10 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Grounding Tab Optional FIGURE 2 8 TTL I O ER w lt N lt R lt 10K __1_ A Te 5V or 3 3V OE R IOGND Eo 22K On R lt TTLIOX a 19 0 5 5V 3 3 3300PF IOGND hd Grounding Tab Optional Normally the HawkEye 1500 chassis is connected to ground via the serial cable or the I O interface cable shield assuming that the cable shield is connected to ground If not a Grounding tab kit is available for the HawkEye 1500 reader The kit provides two grounding tabs a Solder tab and a 0 187 Faston tab that gets mounted to one of the HDB 15 hex standoffs see Figure 2 9 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 2 11 Chapter DC IN eeeee 2 l eeeee K 187 Faston Tab oa ESLA
122. Note These are the only PIDs available to the RETRY commands even though there are 15 open PID slots on the camera FIGURE 4 19 Copy Current Settings to PID Dialog Box PID Copy Copy Current Settings to PID Copying PID to Current This menu item allows you to copy the PID settings 1 through 15 plus read only 99 to the current settings PID 0 4 28 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner FIGURE 4 20 Copy to Current Settings from PID Dialog Box Copy to Current Settings from PID Setting Up Text Matching The Camera Report window Figure 4 21 displays detailed information Cycles Decodes and Locates and so on about what the HawkEye 1500 camera is reading n FIGURE 4 21 ReadRunner Camera Report Window djhawkeye1500 CTRL Camera Report E tc Cycles 392845 392810 35 FE Decodes 392810 15 Located 392825 20 Text Matching disabled Matches 0 0 If you also want to display detailed information about the number of passed and failed text matches you have to specify the text in the Match Mode Setup window To set up text matching 1 Press Ctrl O or select Match Mode Settings from the Settings menu ReadRunner displays the Match Mode Setup window as shown in Figure 4 22 2 Click to enable Enable Text Matching ReadRunner displays the Match String text box Figure 4 22
123. Nov 2008 TABLE 4 11 CD Fields Continued Using ReadRunner Field Description 21 Overall AIM Verification Grade 22 Unformatted decode data Length raw data 23 Photometry Settings Auto Manual Gain Exposure 24 Image Timestamp 25 Image Data Raw Width Height Gray scale Values TABLE 4 12 ID Fields Field Description 01 Image Data Bmp 32 bit Length Binary Values 02 Image Data Tiff 32 bit Length Binary values All data is written in binary format on the corresponding output port TCP only Any 32 bit data is first converted to network order before being sent The Enabled check box specifies whether or not the data in each text box gets sent out the serial port o c 3 oc Header Enter the header information you want displayed When you select the checkbox for a given string the header information precedes the text Trailer Enter the trailer information you want displayed When you select the checkbox for a given string the trailer information follows the text Decode Pass When checked send the data in the text box out the serial port on every successful decode Decode Fail When checked send the data in the text box out the serial port on every unsuccessful decode v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 85 Chapter ReadRunner RT Error A Runtime error which include
124. ONG 6312 TOO SHORT 6313 30P CHARACTER ERROR 6321 240 TOO LONG 3 6322 240 TOO SHORT 6323 240 CHARACTER ERROR gt 6331 TOO LONG 2 6332 30T TOO SHORT 6333 CHARACTER ERROR Xo 6399 NO CURRENT PART NUMBER ue zt 9 Io QuicSet amp Symbol Photometry When the HawkEye is set up in triggered mode Auto Photometry may not be appropriate When the Photometry values need to be known ahead of time because the time cannot be spent determining Gain and Exposure values the QuicSet amp Symbol Photometry function can be invoked to determine the correct Gain and Exposure to be used for the part Perform one of the following procedures Procedure 1 If the part to be read is aligned then follow this procedure 1 Insert a paper clip into the hole marked QuicSet and press once Any time after hearing a beep press the QuicSet button again to exit The Photometry value Gain and Exposure have been determined OR Procedure 2 If the part to be read is not aligned then follow this procedure 1 Insert a paper clip into the hole marked QuicSet and press once v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 3 35 Chapter HawkEye 1500 Series Overview 2 Ensure that the yellow Mode light is flashing Physically position the HawkEye 1500 until the laser dots are almost together for small Data Matrix symbols or slightly farther apart on the horizontal axis fo
125. Presentation Mode Parameters similar to those for Demo mode are used with the exception that an inter symbol wait time ISWT is imposed This means that when a symbolis presented to the HawkEye 1500 s field of view it will be read once The same symbol cannot be read again until the symbol is removed from the field of view for at least the indicated ISWT A different symbol when presented to the camera will be read immediately Lighting Modes Symbols or marks that are to be read by the HawkEye 1500 must be illuminated for optimum read performance Depending on the type of surface texture or ambient light surrounding the symbol the lighting may be customized In addition there are several models of the HawkEyeTM 1500 available Chapter 1 Configurations and it is assumed that you have purchased the model that is optimal for the application that you are deploying All models have the following configurations available to control the light installed on your particular unit On Off Strobe 3 4 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Lighting Modes Power Strobe On With Power Strobe External may be used with any of the other modes As detailed earlier in this chapter when you select one of the four Application Modes ReadRunner selects the appropriate lighting mode You may override these selections as desired The details of each are as follows Note Strobing minimizes the heat produ
126. RFOCUSLIMT BE 3 After you finish aligning and adjusting the camera click h Turbo Live DO NOT LOOK AT THE LASER WHEN READING PARTS THAT ARE HIGHLY REFLECTIVE BE CAREFUL THAT THE LASER IS NOT REFLECTED INTO SOMEONF S EYE v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 13 Chapter ReadRunner Note HE1500 XL do not have lasers Note When Verification is set to AIM DPM 1 2006 selecting Turbo Live will display concentric squares as video overlay to the live images Live Video will perform automatic exposure control to improve the contrast of the image Using Learn During Image Optimization Use the following procedure to learn photometry and decoder settings 1 Click Lean to begin learning photometry and decoder settings ReadRunner displays the Learn window as shown in Figure 4 9 FIGURE 4 9 Learn Window djhawkeye1500 CTRL Learn ES x Learn Photometry Only Leam Decoder Settings Only Learn Decoder and Unlearn Decoder and Photometry Set Photo to AUTO Done 2 Select Learn Photometry And Decoder Settings 3 Click Learn Decoder and Photometry and then Done 4 14 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Setting Up Your Application The camera learns the photometry and decoder settings For more information about Learn Unlearn and Assisted Learn see Learning amp Unlearning on page 4 101 Displaying Camera R
127. SA ETHERNET N PWR LK Hag ACT L QuicSet Connecting to the HawkEye 1500 FIGURE 2 9 Grounding Tab Mounting Location Solder Tab Table 2 9 lists the Grounding tab part numbers and descriptions for the HawkEye 1500 TABLE 2 9 Grounding Tab Part Numbers Part Number A1 40201 1 HawkEye Grounding Tab Kit includes 958 0039 1 0 187 Faston tab with 45 bend 958 0040 4 Solder tab with 45 bend Use the following steps to install the grounding tab 1 Remove one of the HDB 15 standoffs using a 3 16 Hex Driver 2 Install the grounding tab either Solder or Faston type and standoff as shown in Figure 2 9 3 Tighten the standoff 2 12 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 I O Expansion Module Optional Expansion Module Optional The I O Expansion Module provides a convenient method of connecting to the HawkEye camera I O signals It combines one dedicated optically isolated sensor input three dedicated optically isolated outputs and four digital I O ports all on one circuit board as shown in Figure 2 10 I O Expansion Module on page 2 14 N All of the I O connections from the camera to the I O Expansion Module are connected via a 15 pin cable e One opto isolated camera sensor input trigger is provided The sensor input requires a bipolar isolated current input 5 24VDC at 1 5mA go o De zo
128. Strobe Output Terminal Block TB1 Figure 2 12 shows the I O expansion module TBI v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 2 17 Chapter Connecting to the HawkEye 1500 FIGURE 2 12 I O Expansion Module TB1 Opto Output 1 A Opto Output 2A 8 Opto Output 3A 10 Strobe Output 12 24 volts 2 Sensor Input A 4 6 Ground 51 TB1 Chassis Ground 3 Ground 5 Sensor Input B Opto Output 1 B 9 Opto Output 2 B 11 Opto Output 3 B CO Ground TABLE 2 12 Pinout Opto In Opto Out amp Strobe Terminal Block TB1 Pin Description Chassis Ground 24 volts 24 volt return Ground Sensor Input A Trigger Sensor Input B Trigger Opto Output 1 A Opto Output 1 B Opto Output 2 A Opto Output 2 B OO CO NI OD Opto Output 3 A 2 18 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 I O Expansion Module Optional TABLE 2 12 Pinout Opto In Opto Out amp Strobe Terminal Block TB1 Continued 11 Opto Output 3 B 12 Strobe 13 Strobe Return Ground 14 Ground N General Purpose I O Terminal Block TB2 Figure 2 13 shows the I O expansion module TB2 FIGURE 2 13 I O Expansion Module TB2 2 go o OE zo p x gt c 6 5 or Opto 1 Opto 2 Opto 3 Opto 4 o
129. TA OD OA Decode Fail Locate Fail Match Pass Code Matched OD 04 Match Fail NO MATCH Error OD 0A4 RT Error Overrun Error ODADA o Disabled e TCP2 By default this port is programmed to send the raw image data CD25 as shown in Figure 4 50 Buffer Length for 57 PLC 4 72 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner FIGURE 4 50 Output Format Strings Window TCP2 Port 49099 Ej configure Formatted Output Standard 1 Header CD25 n Trailer Decode Pass Y Decode Fail Locate Fail viv Match Pass Y Y Match Fail RT Error Fixed Buffer Length for 57 PLC Disabled e TCP3 By default this port is programmed to send the image data as bmp binary stream ID01 32 bit length data as shown in Figure 4 51 gt tc tc Note The keyword is programmed in the Header so that it can be entered only once for all programmable output strings v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 73 Chapter ReadRunner FIGURE 4 51 Output Format Strings Window TCP3 Port 49100 EJ Configure Formatted Output Enabled Header 1D01 Trailer Decode Pass Y Decode Fail v Locate Fail viv Match Pass Y Y Match Fail RT Error jo Disabled e TCP4 By default this port is not progr
130. TING 4 5 Ext strobe 1 external strobe 1 EXTERNAL 10 7 TTL IO 2 In out General purpose I O 2 out NOT USED 5 tz 8 TTL IO 3 In out General purpose l O 3 out RTE OUT 5 11 9 9 TTL IO 4 In out General purpose I O 4 in GPIO IN 4 5 12 DURATION E 15 return common DC ground shell chassis gt ground O Notes 1 Nonc isolated utility power for sensor and or opto current loops 2 Bipolar isolated current input 5 24V 1 5 ma 250VAC isolation 3 Bipolar isolated output switch Ron 35 ohm max Ion 50 ma Voff 50VDC 250VAC isolation 4 4V 20 ma positive pulse in strobe mode 5 OUT 20 ma sink 2 2K to 5V pullup IN TTL 1V hysteresis 6 Opto isolated camera sensor trigger Note Notes 7 through 12 refer to default I O assignment This may change according to user assignment 10 Read Pass signal for I O Pass Fail modes Read Pass Fail for I O Data Valid modes Read Fail signal either decode locate or match fail for I O Pass Fail modes Not used for I O Data Valid modes Data Valid signal used in all pipelined I O modes External equipment can read result of decode while this signal is asserted Controls the external strobe light Set in Application mode gt Lighting v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 2 9 Chapter Connecting to the HawkEye 1500 11 Runtime Error signal programmed to assert when Trigger Read Timeout Overruns and or
131. True Each of the configurable lines is displayed with the polarity keyword name and behavior desired Note A given keyword name may only be configured for one physical line at a time Supported Keyword Names The supported keyword names are e PASS May also represent a MATCHED state if a Match Mode is enabled v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 59 Chapter ReadRunner FAIL May also represent a NO MATCH state if a Match Mode is enabled DV Data Valid This line is set on when results of a decode have been set and other lines are stable RTE Real Time Error Indicates trigger overflows timeout errors and network failures GOOD Used by the Verification option FAIR Used by the Verification option POOR Used by the Verification option ANGLE FAILURE Signals when the measured angle is outside of your process limits Default Behavior NOMINAL DEV Nominal Value 0 Deviation Value 15 LOCATE_FAILURE May be used as an overall indicator or masked to signal particular types of locate failures Default Behavior MASK Mask Value amp H7FFFFFF DECODE FAILURE If used when Match Mode is enabled it allows you to distinguish between NO MATCH with a successful Decode and NO MATCH with an unsuccessful Decode MATCH FAILURE When used in conjunction with the PASS signal when a Match Mode is enabled prov
132. Window Code 39 Parameters ily sqa1500_001 Tune Camera x NEM Parameters Optional CheckSum Enable OFF oe 2 LUndo Auto Learn Optional Remove CS Display OFF Auto Learn Parameters Optional Check Sum Enable Enable this item if the Code 39 barcode contains a checksum character Optional Remove CS Display If the CheckSum is present should it be displayed 4 118 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Fine Tuning amp Monitoring Your Application I20f5 Parameters To modify 120 5 parameters 1 Press Ctrl A or select Advanced Tuning from the Windows menu 2 Select I20f5 Parameters in the pull down window ReadRunner displays the window shown in Figure 4 79 FIGURE 4 79 Advanced Window I20f5 Parameters jjsqa1500 001 Tune Camera oe Undo Auto Learn Auto Learn Parameters Optional CheckSum Enable OFF Optional Remove CS Display OFF Optional Check Sum Enable Enable this item if the I20f5 contains a checksum character Optional Remove CS Display If the CheckSum is present should it be displayed UPC Parameters To modify UPC parameters 1 Press Ctrl A or select Advanced Tuning from the Windows menu 2 Select UPC Parameters in the pull down window ReadRunner displays the window shown in Figure 4 80 FIGURE 4 80 Advanced Window UPC Parameters hawkeyee005e9 CTRL Tune Camera
133. adRunner to take control again What do I do B 5 had control of the camera over the serial port and left the machine for a few minutes When came back the camera was no longer under control What happened B 5 I m using the Part Queue to record images on the camera but after a while the camera runs much slower What s going on B 6 Do the version numbers have to match 6 What s the timing for normal strobe and power strobe I m assuming that both strobe modes would go off immediately after the trigger or the configured delay and then stay on for some fixed duration Is that correct What s the duration Is the duration different for each strobe mode B 6 Is the Exposure in the Photometry dialog and command the same as the Shutter on the HawkEye 15 B 7 What exactly happens with auto photometry when using a sensor as a trigger The HawkEye has only one chance to get an image so can only imagine that the settings are adjusted after each image hoping that the adjustment will be appropriate for the next part Am I correct 7 I m trying to re install all my computer software after it was attacked by a virus When run the ReadRunner install neither the Repair option xii HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 APPENDIX C APPENDIX D Contents nor the Remove option seems to do anything How can re install ReadRunner once this happens B 7 Sometimes when using a Logitech mouse an
134. ader sec vx Works kernel image To run the bootloader C 2 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using HawkEye Bootloader 1 Power up your camera while pressing in the Quicset button 2 Connect the serial cable to the camera and your PC 3 Run HyperTerminal by selecting Start Programs Accessories 4 Connect to the appropriate serial port using the following settings Baud Rate 115200 Data Bits 8 Parity Stop Bits 1 Flow Control None 5 Click OK The following information is displayed HawkEye BootLoader HE1500 Ver 5 45 Flash d m dt gt gt 206MHz 32MB RAM 4MB Dump memory odify memory Display tests Execute test Dump boot params odify boot params Display menu Dump flash blocks Dump enet regs Write MAC reg Write PHY reg Dump CPU registers Get Flash size Get RAM size I Cache control File transfer Reset unit Jump to app Display error Help 6 i Og o i e v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual Appendix Kel Upgrading Camera Software 6 Press X to download a SEC file 7 Select Send File from the Transfer menu 8 Browse for bootloader Reader sec on the CD select Xmodem as the protocol and then click Send as shown in Figure C 1 FIGURE C 1 Send File Window Send File 5 cdrom cam_bin 32MB bootloader_Reader sed
135. al duration time 3 30 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Formatted Output amp Audio TABLE 3 5 Three Line Multiplex of Verification Results Line Keyword Name State Good Fair Poor Good On Off Off Fair Off On Off 3 Poor Off Off On Fail Off Off Off Formatted Output amp Audio The HawkEye 1500 supports formatted output via the serial port as well as through TCP IP You can configure the camera to output custom text optionally with headers and footers based on pass fail status and even specific failure status This data 1s then transmitted to the serial port and any TCP connections on port 49098 gt i5 T z 0 2 me x2 Go rw The camera supports different pass fail criteria for outputting data This includes Decode Pass Decode Fail Locate Fail Match Pass Match Fail and Runtime Error Runtime errors include trigger overruns decoder overruns acquisition timeouts or network connection errors Each type of output has an associated format string Within this string you can output specific characters ABCD 1234 etc or non printable characters CR LF TAB Non printable characters are denoted by using a backslash followed by the hexadecimal value of the non printable Some common non printable characters include 00 NULL character N09 TAB character TAB 0A Line Feed LF 0C Form Feed FF
136. amaged symbols Figure D 1 illustrates a Data Matrix on an actual part D 2 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Data Matrix FIGURE D 1 Data Matrix Example Figure D 2 illustrates the differences between 2D and 1D symbols D FIGURE D 2 2D Data Matrix vs 1D Code 39 c 5 2D Data Matrix vs 1D Code 39 E Height is redundant gt peas vee contrast gt usually up Dimensional gt o Both height amp width are used to encode data Works with contrast as low as 20 gt Two Dimensional Readable through 360 of rotation Data Matrix Components Data Matrix consists of a solid border a broken border a data storage area and a quiet zone as shown in Figure D 3 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual D 3 Appendix Symbology Reference FIGURE D 3 Data Matrix Components Solid Border Quiet zone Broken Border around the borders Data Storage Quiet Zone 8 J Data Matrix symbol shown complete Solid Border Border Data Storage The HawkEye 1500 uses the solid border to calculate the rotation of a Data Matrix symbol The HawkEye 1500 uses the broken border to identify the number of rows and columns in a symbol The data storage area contains the binary information that was encoded during the construction of the Data Matrix The data storage area 1s illustrated in Figure D 4 showing h
137. amera was powered up Green indicates read rate for the last 20 reads gt tc tc v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 95 Chapter ReadRunner FIGURE 4 65 ReadRunner Charts Window Timing Data schawkeye CTRL Chart Q Display Timing Data Cycle Time Read Time Acquire Time This window displays timing information about the current images that the HawkEye 1500 camera is reading Display Timing Data Displays cycle time read time and acquire time graphically Yellow indicates cycle time Green indicates decode time Red indicates acquisition time Information About Cameras on the Network The Network Overview window displays information about HawkEye 1500 cameras on the network To display the Network Overview window 1 Press F12 or select Network Overview from the Windows menu ReadRunner displays the Network Overview window as shown in Figure 4 66 4 96 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 buildlabcam dihawkeye1500 hawkeyeld he 4013 he md424 mfgtest2 serge he1515 slot 16 sqa jah1500 sqal500 002 1500 ija workingagain Using ReadRunner FIGURE 4 66 ReadRunner Network Overview Window Refresh Network Button djhawkeye1500 Network Overview IP Address 10 2 1 48 10 2 1 147 10 2 1 21 10 2 1 33 10 2 1 114 10 2 1 202 10 2 1 87 10 2 1 184 10 2 1 121 10 2
138. ammed as shown in Figure 4 52 Fixed Buffer Length for 57 PLC 4 74 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner FIGURE 4 52 Output Format Strings Window TCP4 Port 49101 configure Formatted Output Standard 2 TCP3 1 fe Decode Pass Decode Fail Locate Fail Match Pass Match Fail RT Error r Fixed Buffer Length for 57 PLC 0 Disabled Fixed Buffer Length for S7 PLC The fixed length data string output can be enabled from the ReadRunner UI or through a command To enable it from the UI set the Fixed Buffer Length parameter in the Configure Formatted Output dialog to a value greater than 1 but no more than 254 To disable the mode set the Fixed Buffer Length to 0 or 1 o tc tc Alternatively use the following command to enable disable the fixed length output OUTPUT port FIXED count where port is one of the following STANDARD TCPI e TCP2 TCP3 TCP4 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 75 Chapter ReadRunner count 0 254 The fixed length output is enabled when the count is between 2 and 254 inclusive and disabled when the count is 0 or 1 All five ports STANDARD for serial and four TCP ports can be configured individually to output data in a different fixed length or to not enable the fixed length mo
139. appenpxF Custom Programming Using a Serial Connection This appendix describes the special considerations you need to know when connecting via a serial port Here are some of the major considerations When using a network connection the device status is broadcast via UDP every 5 seconds This means that the Device and Connection objects know the current status of the device at all times and can send events when the situation changes This is not the case when using a serial port and if you want to emulate this behavior the DeviceInfo must be manually updated using a timer e Inanetwork connection you can make a ReportConnection or ImageConnection and get events whenever new data is available With a serial connection you must manually initiate a report upload using the REPORTREQ command This sample illustrates how to use a timer to hook images and or reports e Whena REPORTREQ has been issued you must either wait for the result or cancel the report Issuing a command with a REPORTREQ outstanding will automatically cancel the report S E 5 o EJ 25 The sample code presents a series of buttons at the top allowing connection to the various COM ports The buttons are disabled if the corresponding port is not available A tabstrip control is used to switch between three views 1 Terminal v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual F 1 Appendix C
140. assigned RTE signals a Real Time Error in other words Trigger Overrun on Pin 8 default assignment on GPIO OUT3 In all of the modes you can configure the polarity of the lines by using the SIGOUT command In the following description the term drive will be assumed to be in the direction you define In addition to the I O lines being driven the results are always presented on the camera status LEDs If the Verification option is being used the camera status LEDs translate to e GOOD PASS LED FAIR PASS FAIL LED e POOR FAIL LED Data Valid Pipelined Note The discussion of pin pairs assumes a default assignment of the I O lines The Data Valid Pipelined Mode drives pin pair 2 12 when the results of the Decode are a success It drives the same line to the opposite direction when the results of the Decode are a failure It then drives pin pair 4 14 for the pre determined duration to indicate that the level on pin pair 2 12 is valid The line will be set to the polarity for an indicated duration You can configure the duration of the signal by using the IO MODE command 3 20 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 I O Operations SIGOUT used to have a delay that was not used by the code It was left in as an option in the case of RTE to avoid rewriting all of the regression test Also SIGOUT applies to the line state and not the variable assigned to the line FI
141. assis ground Opto Outputs There are three opto outputs The opto outputs are brought out directly from the 15 pin HD Sub header J1 to barrier strip TB1 positions 6 through 11 The opto isolated outputs represent the camera s output signals These signals are bipolar isolated output switches and are located within the camera General Purpose I O Four positions are available for industry standard Opto 22 54 type input or output isolator modules The field wiring to 2 14 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 I O Expansion Module Optional these modules is terminated on the barrier strip TB2 General Purpose I O ports isolator modules 1 through 4 may be configured as either inputs or outputs The TTL I O signals from the camera enter via the 15 pin HD Sub header J1 on positions 5 7 8 amp 9 corresponding to General Purpose I O points 1 through 4 The TTL I O signals are filtered with EMI T filters There are four LED s that indicate whenever the TTL I O signals are ON low The LED s operate whether or not an isolator module is plugged in N Jumper JMP1 must be set to positions 2 amp 3 to use General Purpose I O 1 Notes Setting JMP1 to positions 2 amp 3 will disable the Strobe output go D zo L d Ox 6 5 or In this position the camera must not be set to External Strobe mode refer to the camera s user manual to set the camera i
142. at Unique Camera Boot Time MAC Address Name HawkEye 00 60 33 60 00 1 1 HawkEyeE0001 1 HawkEye 00 60 33 0 00 12 HawkEyeE00012 HawkEye 00 60 33 0 00 13 HawkEyeE00013 HawkEye 00 60 33 0 00 14 HawkEyeE00014 HawkEye 00 60 33 0 00 15 HawkEyeE00015 e Address The burned in address of the camera s network adapter This is set in the factory you cannot change it Note Each camera s unique mac address is labeled on the bottom of the unit Domain The domain For example acut com e Use DHCP Use dynamic IP addressing DHCP instead of static addressing Contact your MIS administrator for information about DHCP e Use Static IP Addressing Use static IP addressing instead of dynamic addressing DHCP Contact your MIS administrator for information about obtaining a static IP address You must specify the following IP Address The IP address of the HawkEye 1500 camera Subnet Mask The subnet mask for the HawkEye 1500 camera Gateway The gateway address Camera Serial Port e Baud Rate Specifies the speed at which the camera will operate Range 600 to 115200 e Parity Is None Odd or Even 4 66 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner e Data Bits Is 7 or 8 e Stop Bits 1 or2 Flow Control Is None Xon Xoff or Hardware PC Serial Ports Select a COM port before setting the following e Baud Rate S
143. atrix Solid Border Timing Border Data Storage Quiet Zone Selection Criteria There are three main considerations for choosing the proper HawkEye type e Resolution e Field of View Working Distance The most important consideration is Resolution All three of these features are governed by lens selection Resolution A Data Matrix is comprised of a series of dark and light cells To obtain optimal READ performance each cell should be imaged by at least 4 to 5 camera pixels To obtain optimal VERIFICATION performance each cell should be imaged by at least 10 camera pixels A Barcode is comprised of a series of light and dark lines To obtain optimal READ performance each line should be seen as at least 2 pixels wide Field of View A second and interrelated consideration is Field of View The field of view should be small enough for the Data Matrix to have at least 4 pixels per cell resolution At the same time the field of view should be large enough to contain the Data Matrix or Barcode as well as to leave enough space around the symbol to compensate for symbol positioning error and the required Quiet Zone Note The Quiet Zone must be at least 1 cell in size A Quiet Zone of 2 cells or more is allowed and makes reading easier 1 4 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 ml Selecting the Correct HawkEye to Read Your Data Matrix Working Distance The Working Di
144. available bandwidth for 1 second The HawkEye 1500 Smart Camera will attempt to connect to the FTP server for each text or image file result In the event that a connection fails the HawkEye 1500 Smart Camera will retry this connection up to 100 times spaced from 1 to 10 ms apart In the event of an unsuccessful FTP connection the HawkEye 1500 Smart Camera will stop retrying and get ready to accept the next trigger This will result in data loss If additional triggers come in before the FTP transfer is done on the buffered data it will result in data loss If the network is broken it will result in data loss Note that there is no non volatile storage on the HawkEye 1500 Smart Camera so a power failure will result in lost data Host IP The IP address of the system running the FTP server it o c c gt oc oc Path The directory on the FTP server where the files will be written Save Results txt Yes or No This only applies to FTP reports Save Images bmp Yes or No This also applies to Save in camera memory save method FTP Records Is either of the following e 0 Records with the file names containing a 9 digit decimal representation of the cycle count 000000000 1 9999 Sequentially labeled records with the file names containing a 4 digit representation 0000 wrapping at N records and overwriting old records 4 Click O
145. beeps that the camera emits on these pass fail conditions By default the camera beeps once when the decode passes You can configure each pass fail condition with up to 3 beeps The format string keywords are furthermore expanded to allow custom binary data to be output from the camera The camera support the new keywords CDxx and IDxx where xx is a 2 digit decimal number The number corresponds to a specific field of data as listed in Table 4 11 and Table 4 12 All the data that was available in the Camera report and could only be accessed by programming can now be programmed into the Formatted Output strings sent by the camera over TCP They are not available on standard output just TCP1 through TCP4 TABLE 4 11 CD Fields Field Description 00 All Data 01 Overall Pass Fail 02 Count of triggers 03 Count of passes 04 Count of failures 05 Count of successful locates 06 Count of failed locates 07 Count of successful decodes 08 Count of failed decodes 09 Count of successful matches 10 Count of failed matches 11 Count of alarms 12 Count of trigger overruns 13 Count of decode overruns 14 Count of acquisition timeouts 15 PID 16 Symbol Pass Fail 17 Located Not Located 18 Decoded Not Decoded 19 Matched Not Matched 0 0 if matching is not active 20 Detailed Decode Failure 4 84 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1
146. bet are mixed Note In the largest symbol 144x144 the first eight Reed Solomon blocks are 218 codewords long encoding 156 data codewords The last two blocks encode 217 codewords 155 data codewords All the blocks have 62 error correction codewords Note The maximum correctable percentage can range between 28 and 39 Data Matrix Specification Details This section provides excerpts from the AIM and ISO Specification For new applications ECC 200 is recommended ECC 000 140 should only be used in closed applications where a single party controls both the production and reading of the symbols and is responsible for overall system performance The characteristics of the code consist of v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual D 9 Appendix Symbology Reference Encodable character set a Values 0 127 in accordance with ANSI X3 4 i e all 128 ASCII characters equivalent to the US national version of ISO 646 b Values 128 255 in accordance with ISO 8859 1 Latin Alphabet No 1 These are referred to as extended ASCII Representation of data A dark module is a binary 1 and a light module is a binary O In a reversed image reverse polarity a light module is a binary 1 and a dark module is a binary 0 Symbol size in modules not including the quiet zone ECC 000 140 9 by 9 to 49 by 49 Odd only ECC 200 10 by 10 to 144 by 144 Even only Note For more information see Table
147. ced when the light 15 on constantly WARNING STROBING MAY HAVE ADVERSE EFFECTS ON HUMANS WHO ARE PRE DISPOSED TO SEIZURES DUE TO PHOTOSENSITIVITY PLACING THE HAWKEYE 1500 IN AN ENCLOSURE CAN MINIMIZE THE EFFECTS OF THE FLASHING OF A STROBE in 2 T oz me 9 Go IO e Off This selection is available when the ambient lighting provided is adequate for the optimal reading of the parts to be deployed Therefore the internal lighting will not be used during the exposure time e On This selection turns the built in lighting on continuously The lighting will be on at all times and at a constant intensity It will be the lighting used during the exposure time e Strobe Strobed lighting is chosen to illuminate the symbol for just the selected exposure time Typically this is chosen when the symbol part to be read 1s in motion and at relatively slow speeds At all other times the HawkEye 1500 turns off the lighting This results in a flashing effect Power Strobe This selection is similar to the strobed selection with the addition of a greater intensity value being supplied This is employed when the part is in motion and at very high speeds The burst of energy supplied for the duration of the exposure time allows parts to be in motion at much greater speeds The maximum limit on exposure time is 1 ms With Power Strobe This selection is provided to keep the lighting on
148. commands that are generated when you click one of the five user buttons in the Terminal window When you click U ReadRunner displays the User Buttons window as shown in Figure 4 63 4 92 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner FIGURE 4 63 User Buttons Window 1 Tool Tip Commands z 2 Tool Tip Commands 2 Tool Tip Commands 7 4 Tool Tip 4 Commands A Tool Tip Commands z gt tc xo _ Specify a tool tip and the commands you can specify more than one for a user button When you are finished click OK Note A user button is enabled when both the Tool Tip text box and the Commands text box contain valid information e Tool Tip This text box contains the message that is displayed when the mouse pointer hovers over a user button For example if the Tool Tip for user button contains Virtual Trigger 1 then Virtual Trigger 1 is displayed when you put the mouse pointer on the 1 Commands This text box contains the actual remote commands that generated when you click a user button For more information about remote v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 93 Chapter ReadRunner commands see the HawkEye 1500 Series Reference amp Programmers Manual Sending Remote Commands to the Camera From the Terminal window you can send remote commands to the camera in t
149. connector 2 39 number matching setting up 4 41 port sending data out 4 85 settings 4 64 Setting Up serial number matching 4 41 text matching 4 29 Settings menu application mode 4 46 4 49 beeper 4 87 4 88 configure part queue 4 120 Ctrl F5 4 87 Ctrl F6 4 53 4 54 Ctrl J 4 64 4 71 Ctrl M 4 46 4 49 Ctrl P 4 22 Ctrl U 4 120 Ctrl V 4 25 io settings 4 53 4 54 output settings 4 71 photometry 4 22 reset statistics 4 18 serial tcp settings 4 64 Shift F5 4 88 symbology and verification 4 25 targeting laser 4 87 Index 10 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 serial 4 64 tcp 4 64 Settings Menu Ctrl O 4 29 4 41 match mode settings 4 29 4 41 Shift F5 4 88 Show Internal Messages Button 4 92 Signals power connector 2 5 Solid Border D 4 Specific Failure 4 122 Start checking 4 117 count 4 42 Static IP Address 4 11 Statistics resetting 4 18 Status LEDs 2 43 network overview window 4 97 Stop and scan mode 3 4 4 48 bits 4 67 checking 4 117 display of new images 4 132 String display decode at top of screen 4 46 Strobe 3 4 3 5 4 49 amp ext 4 49 Structured Append D 11 Subnet Mask 4 66 Supermarket Mode 3 4 4 48 SW Version 4 98 Symbol density D 6 ECC 200 attributes D 8 Symbologies selecting 4 100 Symbology and Verification Window 4 25 T Tabs general 4 45 image display 4 46 report connectivity 4 44 Take Control 4 5 4 6 Index Taking Control of a Camera 4 7 Target Laser
150. d is ON the default the HawkEye 1500 decodes data left to right When Decode Forward Backward is OFF the HawkEye 1500 decodes data from right to left This mode should not be used for SEMI BC412 barcode that contains both Start Stop patterns and Check Sum Default On QR Code Parameters To modify QR Code parameters 1 Press Ctrl A or select Advanced Tuning from the Windows menu 2 Select QR Code Parameters in the pull down window ReadRunner displays the window shown in Figure 4 77 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 117 Chapter ReadRunner FIGURE 4 77 Advanced Window QR Code Parameters pe S qa1500_001 Tune Camera x e e I Finder Pattern Misalignment 0 Polarity AUTO Undo Auto Learn Auto Learn Parameters Finder Pattern Misalignment Select the appropriate value to handle finder pattern alignment error when the cells in the finder pattern and the remaining cells do not line up correctly Polarity Select Dark on Light Light on Dark or AUTO depending on how the code is presented to the camera If AUTO is not used some performance enhancement should be seen by giving a hint to the locator Code 39 Parameters To modify Code 39 parameters 1 Press Ctrl A or select Advanced Tuning from the Windows menu 2 Select Code 39 Parameters in the pull down window ReadRunner displays the window shown in Figure 4 78 FIGURE 4 78 Advanced
151. d lens selection criteria should be employed to select the correct optics for your application Selecting Lighting Standard Light Selection The HawkEye 1515 and HawkEye 1525 come with built in lights and built in lenses 1 6 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Selecting the Correct HawkEye to Read Your Data Matrix HawkEye 1515 FIGURE 1 5 HawkEye 1515 ml i 57 15mm 2 250 m 28 58mm 1 125 22 23mm CESSAT LEN SUR ae 875 44 45mm 1 750 The HawkEye 1515 has a small light ring built on the front of the unit The ring is 1 75 H 44 45mm x 1 25 H 31 75mm at the center of the emission zone The ring is aimed in 15 to converge 3 76 2mm from the front on the unit When the unit is used perpendicular to the part the light acts as a bright o c 5 5 D c 116 51mm 4 587 Mag c 111 76mm 4 400 22 86mm 88 90mm 900 3 500 Em field high angle ring light A second useful configuration is to angle the unit 20 off of vertical In this configuration the light acts as a directional high angle spotlight The HawkEye 1515 configuration is the universal reader for the broadest range of Data Matrix and Barcode reading applications Note The HawkEye 1515 XL does not have lasers v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye
152. d scrolling with the wheel see crashes in ReadRunner especially in the Network Overview form What do to fix this behavior 8 Trouble Reading B 8 Setting the HawkEye 1500 to Factory Default Settings 8 Samples of Reader Programming Data Matrices 8 Setting Serial Communications B 8 Setting Triggers B 9 Resetting B 9 Setting Targeting B 9 Setting Beeper B 9 Setting Illumination B 9 Resetting ROI B 9 Setting Learn Unlearn B 10 Setting Photometry B 10 Saving B 10 Setting DHCP B 10 Upgrading Camera Software C 1 Overview C 1 Using HawkEye Bootloader C 2 Using HawkEye Flasher C 5 Symbology Reference D 1 Data Matrix D 1 Data Matrix Certification 0 1 What Is Data Matrix 0 1 Data Matrix Components D 3 Data Matrix Error Correction D 5 Bit Versus Codeword D 6 Data Matrix Encoding Schemes 0 7 ECC 000 140 D 7 ECC 200 D 8 Data Matrix Specification Details D 9 Summary of Additional Features 0 11 Symbol Structure D 11 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual xiii Contents Creating a Data Matrix 0 12 Reader Programming Data Matrix D 13 Symbol Samples 0 14 2 D Symbols 0 14 Data Matrix Data 123456789 D 14 PDF417 Data PDF417 sample D 14 1 D Symbols 0 14 Code 128 Data This is Code 128 D 14 Code 93 Data 1234 CODE 93 D 14 Code 39 Data ABCD CODE 39 D 15 Interleaved 2 of 5 Data 25251234567890 0 15 Codabar Data 1234567890 D 15 EAN 13
153. dRunner displays the window shown in Figure 4 74 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 113 Chapter ReadRunner FIGURE 4 74 Advanced Window Expert Settings fj sqa1500_001 Tune Camera Undo Auto Learn Auto Learn Parameters Auto Min Exposure 3 Auto Max Exposure Auto Min Gain Auto Max Gain 150 410 REFLECTANCE CALIBRATEI PIXELS AUTO Contrast Report Cell Unit Report Aperture Min Exposure The minimum exposure time for auto photometry Default 30 Auto Max Exposure The maximum exposure time for auto photometry Default 10030 Min Gain The minimum gain for auto photometry Default 150 Auto Max Gain The maximum gain for auto photometry Default 410 Contrast Report This is no longer used as a customer settable parameter If contrast is calibrated it is reported as REFLECTANCE CALIBRATED if not calibrated it is reported as UNCALIBRATED A Cell Unit Report The units to report cell size in MILS or PIXELS Note MILS is only valid if the camera is calibrated See the HawkEye 1500 Series Verification Manual 4 114 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Fine Tuning amp Monitoring Your Application Aperture Used with ISO15415 calibration See the HawkEye 1500 Series Verification Manual Data Matrix Fine Tune To fine tune Data Matrix
154. de at all When the fixed length string output mode is enabled th formatted output data up to 252 characters will be pre pended with two characters as follows charl char2 formatted output data The first character in the string charl has the type information which contains the ASCII value of the following characters O Indicates that the formatted output data is the result of Decode Pass event O KDEC Dp Indicates that the formatted output data is the result of Decode Fail event D ECFL L Indicates that the formatted output data is the result of Locate Fail event L OCFL Indicates that the formatted output data is the result of Match Pass event OK M ATCH Indicates that the formatted output data is the result of Match Fail event MATCHFL Match R Indicates that the formatted output data is the result of RT Error event R TE The second character in the string char2 contains the length value of the formatted output data If the length of the formatted output data is less than count 2 then the characters after the last character of the formatted output will be replaced by If the length of the formatted output data is more than count 2 then the formatted output data will be truncated such that only the first count 2 characters will be outputted with the char2 containing the length value of count 2 4 76 HawkEye 1500 Serie
155. de with OPTI Pass OPT2 Fail Pass Fail Only Pipelined PULSE PIPELINED mode with OPTI Pass OPT2 Fail v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 55 Chapter ReadRunner Data Valid Full Handshake Handshake mode with 1 Pass OPT2 Fail OPT3 Data Valid Data Valid Pipelined PULSE PIPELINED mode with Pass Fail OPT3 Data Valid JDpV 2Line Verify Full HS GOOD FAIR POOR multiplexed on two assigned lines plus Data Valid 3 Line Verify Full HS GOOD FAIR POOR Data Valid lines are assigned DV 2 Line Verify Pulse GOOD FAIR POOR multiplexed on two assigned lines plus Data Valid DV 3 Line Verify Pulse GOOD FAIR POOR Data Valid lines are assigned Click Apply Click OK When you select an IO Mode ReadRunner displays suggested line definitions to guide you through the next step IO Assignment as shown in Figure 4 43 See also Table 4 5 4 56 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner FIGURE 4 43 I O Settings Window Suggested Line Definitions djhawkeye1500 CTRL 10 Settings Trigger Use Trigger on OPTO IN 1 10 Behavior ail Only Full Handshake 10 Assignment This lOMode requires the definition of the following lines to work correctly Pass Fail Dv RTE 10 Assignment Cancel Apply o The de
156. devices e g switches wired between the other contact and 2 24 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 I O Expansion Module Optional the common terminal Output modules are often wired to the common terminal with loads returning to the hot terminal N Figure 2 21 shows four sample wiring diagrams for Input AC Output AC Input DC and Output DC Opto modules on terminal block TB2 Opto I Positions 1 amp 2 e Opto 2 Positions 3 amp 4 e Opto 3 Positions 5 amp 6 Opto 4 Positions 7 amp 8 e 2 n E 4 gt I pen o oO Note Correct polarity is critical for DC modules The odd numbered terminals on the I O board are positive and the even numbered terminals are negative Jumper JMP1 must be set to positions 2 and 3 to use opto 1 TTL 1 in I O mode v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 2 25 Chapter Connecting to the HawkEye 1500 FIGURE 2 21 I O Expansion Module G4 Opto I O Wiring Examples L1 mo L1 EXER LOOP LOAD LOOP L2 SUPPLY L2 SUPPLY 5 a OH 9 Input DC Output AC o 8 INPUT AC OUTPUT AC USING USING STANDARD STANDARD MOUNTING RACK
157. ds in the Bootloader Menu O Syntax gt gt h Diagnostic Test Menu The Diagnostic Test Menu displays a list of tests that are currently supported for HawkEye 1500 diagnostic debug and verification development Each test can be executed individually or as part of a group that is determined by attributes associated with the test o e o v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 6 13 Chapter The Bootloader Note The attributes are set internal to the software and cannot be modified at runtime Test suites are grouped in increments of 10 starting with test 100 For example bus tests are part of the suite numbered 100 109 flash related tests are 110 119 and so forth 10 All Tests 20 All Mfg Tests 30 All Internal Tests 40 All Power on Tests 100 All Bus Tests 101 Data Line 102 Address Line 103 Memory Cell 104 Inverted Cell 110 All Flash Tests 112 Flash Bootloader 113 Flash Blocks 120 All RS232 Tests 121 RS232 Internal 122 RS232 Interrupt 130 All Ethernet Tests 131 Ethernet Reset 132 Ethernet MAC Lpbk 133 Ethernet PHY Lpbk 134 Ethernet EXT Lpbk 135 Ethernet Interrupt Table 6 2 enumerates which tests ar xecuted for groups 10 All Tests 20 All Mfg Tests 30 All Internal Tests and 40 All Power on Tests TABLE 6 2 The Tests That Are Executed All Int
158. e Enabling the option will help the algorithm decode a Data Matrix with outlined cells only In this case the On and Off cells have little or no contrast but they are separated by edges of the cells BC412 Parameters To modify BC412 parameters 1 Press Ctrl A or select Advanced Tuning from the Windows menu 2 Select BC412 Parameters in the pull down window ReadRunner displays the window shown in Figure 4 76 4 116 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Fine Tuning amp Monitoring Your Application FIGURE 4 76 Advanced Window BC412 Parameters 4 5qa1500_001 Tune Camera X 5 t Polarity Start Stop Checking L ence Auto Learn Optional CheckSum Enable Auto Learn Parameters Optional Remove CS Display Decode Forward Backward Polarity When the polarity is known select either Dark on Light or Light on Dark from the drop down list When polarity is not known select AUTO the default Start Stop Checking When ON the HawkEye 1500 looks for a start pattern and a stop pattern on the BC412 barcode Default Off Optional Check Sum Enable Enable this item if the BC412 barcode contains a checksum character Optional Remove CS Display If the CheckSum is present should it be displayed it o gt oc tc Decode Forward Backward This is only useful when Start Stop Checking is OFF When Decode Forward Backwar
159. e 115200 Parity 0 Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Flow Ctrl 0 System Parameters EIP Enable 0 Load Job 1 Run Job 1 POST Flags 0x0200 Speaker 1 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Bootloader Menu Advanced TCP IP Settings TCP Command 49095 TCP Lossy 49096 TCP Lossless 49097 TCP PLC 49098 TCP Heartbeat 49094 TCP Heartbeat query 49093 SNTP Intval 0 SNTP Server mbp Modify Boot Parameters The mbp command modifies boot parameters The command can be invoked in either Standalone or Manufacturing Mode Standalone Mode Entering the mbp command by itself represents Standalone Mode and causes the bootloader to prompt you for each and every parameter Parameters are displayed in groups of functionality A new value may be entered or skipped altogether by pressing the Enter key At any point you may terminate the session by pressing the ESC key and then the Enter key The bootloader automatically determines if a change has been made and if so prompts you as to whether or not changes should be saved to flash Syntax O gt gt mbp field value gt gt mbp TCP Connectivity Settings Network Name hawkeye Use DHCP 1 DHCP APIPA IP 169 254 0 0 DHCP APIPA Netmask 255 255 0 0 DHCP Retry Timer 300 IP Address 168 192 254 3 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 Domain Name acut com Enable UDP Announce o
160. e F7 see page 4 18 Load Camera Configuration To Camera F8 see page 4 18 Copy Current to PID see page 4 28 Copy PID to Current see page 4 28 Save Current Image F9 see page 4 129 Load Image Files To Camera Ctrl I see page 4 129 Use Camera for Acquisition Ctrl Q see page 4 130 Preferences see page 4 44 Application Mode Ctrl M see page 4 46 IO Settings Ctrl F6 see page 4 54 Match Mode Settings Ctrl O see page 4 29 Symbology and Verification Ctrl V see page 4 25 o c c gt oc tc Output Settings Ctrl G see page 4 71 Beep Control Ctrl B see page 4 88 Photometry Ctrl P see page 4 22 Configure Part Queue Ctrl U see page 4 120 Targeting Laser see page 4 86 Beeper Shift F5 see page 4 87 Reset Statistics see page 4 18 Serial TCP Settings Ctrl J see page 4 64 Windows Menu contains the following menu items Terminal Window Ctrl T see page 4 91 Report Window Ctrl R see page 4 15 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 3 Chapter ReadRunner Advanced Tuning Ctrl A see page 4 104 Charting Window Ctrl H see page 4 94 Filmstrip Recorder Ctrl F see page 4 131 Network Overview F12 see page 4 96 Verification Report F2 see page 4 90 Help Menu contains the following menu item ReadRunne Table 4 About ReadRunner see page 4 98 r Shortcut Keys 1 contains the ReadRunne
161. e and the number of fragmented blocks of memory Read Rate e Overall Is the overall read rate percentage Last 20 Is the read rate percentage for the last 20 reads Reads Min e Overall The overall number of reads per minute Worst The lowest number of reads per minute AIM Grade Overall When the verification is set to AIM mode the Overall Grade is defined by AIM as the lowest grade of Symbol Contrast Axial Nonuniformity Print Growth and Unused Error Correction When verification is set to None the Overall Grade is blank e Growth Measures how much the Data Matrix cells are over or under printed Ideally the dark cell and light cell should be of the same size which is the Nominal Cell Size For overprinted Data Matrix the print growth is a positive value For underprinted Data Matrix the print growth is negative corresponding to cell shrinkage The print growth is based on the cells on the two timing borders For example for a dark on light Data Matrix suppose the nominal cell size is 10 pixels and all dark cells have the average cell size 12 pixels then the print growth is 12 10 10 20 If we assume the average cell size of the dark cells is 8 pixels then the print growth is 8 10 10 20 The AIM print growth D value is 4 16 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Setting Up Your Application equal to growth multiplied by 3 3 The AIM grade for growth is A if
162. e PartQ options selected Save Method The Part queue must be activated for either mode to function Then you can specify the qualifier and number of records to save Note When left at zero Maximum Records has a different meaning for each mode Save in camera memory This is the default All available memory stores read records Typically there is enough space for the last 30 records when programmed to store Images as well and about 5000 records when programmed to store reports without images Older records are dropped to make room for new ones over time such that the last N records are always available in memory Note When programmed in this mode records saved on the camera can be retrieved by a remote client at any time over TCP or Serial Retrieving records over TCP does not impact performance of the Reader however retrieving reports over Serial will degrade the performance of the Reader 4 122 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Fine Tuning amp Monitoring Your Application You can use the part queue mechanism to buffer Read cycle reports over time 30 cycles with images 5000 cycles without such that 1f the communication to the camera over TCP is lost past read data can be siphoned out of the camera once the client reconnects This logic can be easily initiated by the client on reconnects by sending the PARTREQ command Save on remote system FTP Records are written to the re
163. e camera to its factory defaults and resume from there To restore the factory default settings to the camera press Ctrl Z or select Restore Factory Defaults from the ReadRunner File menu Click Yes when asked if you wish to control camera X ReadRunner displays the message Camera settings are restored to defaults The HawkEye 1500 camera also beeps once What if Learn succeeds but read fails When Learn or Assisted Learn is successful the Pixels Per Cell should ideally be set to the average cell size in pixels This value can be estimated by dividing the Matrix Height by the Number of Matrix Rows If this value is far greater than the default value of 6 then it can increase the decode time significantly An attempt to optimize the HawkEye 1500 for speed for a variety of applications is to always set the Pixels Per Cell to 6 regardless of the actual value In rare situations this optimization can have negative impact on the robustness Therefore 1f an image fails to read when Learn is successful try to increase or decrease the Pixels Per Cell gradually until the image is decoded My decode data is very long Is there a way to disable the sending of this data on the serial port If your data is very long it may take a long time to report this data on the serial port If you are not using the serial port at all you can gain this time back for processing You can disable the serial port connectivity by using the CONSOLE command
164. e is the default application mode It is fully automatic in operation Illumination targeting automatic photometry and continuous triggering are all on The HawkEye 1500 will continuously read any symbol that is aligned to the laser target dots that is placed in the field of view v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 3 3 gt 15 2 T 0 oz me x2 Go IO Chapter HawkEye 1500 Series Overview Motion This mode scans a symbol when it moves within the HawkEye 1500 s field of view Because the parts are in motion there is no time for the automatic calculation of photometry values Thus automatic photometry is off You must specify the exposure and gain settings manually A trigger is supplied through the I O connector to the camera by a sensor device In addition the Lighting selection will be Power strobe This selection allows the parts to be moving at a very high speed where short exposure times are desired Stop and Scan This mode scans a symbol when it stops within the HawkEye 1500 s field of view A trigger is supplied through the I O connector to the camera by a sensor device when the symbol is in place The illumination and laser targeting are set to strobe and the automatic photometry control is on When the trigger is supplied the HawkEye 1500 will determine the correct gain and exposure and read the symbol Supermarket This is often referred to as
165. ecoding time 1 From the Learn window select Learn Decoder Settings Only 2 Select check Enable Assisted Learn ReadRunner displays the Enable Assisted Learn dialog box as shown in Figure 4 71 FIGURE 4 71 Enable Assisted Learn Dialog Box Assisted Learn Num Rows Num Cols Polarity DARK ON LIGHT tc tc 3 Specify the following Num Rows The number of rows expected in the Data Matrix Range 8 144 Num Cols The number of columns expected in the Data Matrix Range 8 144 Polarity The expected polarity of the Data Matrix Valid values DARK ON LIGHT or LIGHT ON DARK 4 ReadRunner also displays a box that you must place around the symbol Use the four corners one at a time to move the box around the symbol 5 Click Done Unlearning To unlearn the learned information v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 103 Chapter ReadRunner 1 Click Take Control 2 Click Yes when asked if you wish to control camera X 3 Click Lean ReadRunner displays the Learn window Figure 4 70 4 Click Unlearn 5 Click Done Note Unlearn unlearns what was set in a previous Learn Modifying Decoding Parameters This section describes modifying the following e Data Matrix Parameters on page 4 104 Barcode Parameters on page 4 109 Expert Set
166. efault assignment lines Pass Fail Only Full Handshake Handshake mode with Pass OUT Fail e Pass Fail Only Pipelined PULSE PIPELINED mode with OUTI Pass OUT Fail Data Valid Full Handshake Handshake mode with OPTO OUTI Pass OPTO OUT2 Fail OPTO OUT3 Data Valid e Data Valid Pipelined PULSE PIPELINED mode with OUTI Pass Fail OUT3 Data Valid In addition with the Verification option the following I O modes are also supported e DY 2 Line Verify Full HS GOOD FAIR POOR multiplexed on two assigned lines plus Data Valid DV 3 Line Verify Full HS GOOD FAIR POOR Data Valid lines are assigned v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 3 19 e T z 2 n x gt I gt gt gt o 29 o Chapter HawkEye 1500 Series Overview DV 2 Line Verify Pulse GOOD FAIR POOR multiplexed on two assigned lines plus Data Valid DV 3 Line Verify Pulse GOOD FAIR POOR Data Valid lines are assigned e None No external lines are driven to indicate any status The mode selection can be made via ReadRunner IO Settings display or via serial command IO MODE mode duration For specifics type HELP IO MODE VERBOSE In any of the I O modes except None the RTE signal may also be
167. egates TRIG v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 3 25 Chapter HawkEye 1500 Series Overview 4 Reader detects TRIG negated and then negates DV TABLE 3 2 Two Line Multiplex of Verification Results Line Keyword Name State Good Poor Good On On Fair On Off Poor Off On Fail Off Off DV 3 Line Verify Full HS The DV 3 Line Verify Full HS Mode drives the Good Fair and Poor lines when the results of the verification are completed see Table 3 3 for the line states of Good Fair Poor and Fail This mode then drives the Data Valid line to indicate that the Good Fair and Poor lines are valid and stable The lines will be set to the desired polarity and will stay at that polarity until the next trigger initiates a new acquisition Figure 3 12 depicts a Trigger occurring which initiates an Image acquisition which in turn is passed on to the Decoder for analysis Once the outcome is determined the Good Fair Poor or Fail is presented on the I O lines until the next trigger occurs 3 26 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 I O Operations FIGURE 3 12 DV 3 Line Verify Full HS Trigger Acquire Decode Present Good Fair Poor DV gt in 2 T 2 2 x2 Go IO Notes 1 When DV is false you can start read by asserting TRIG 2 When read is completed reader sets the Good Fair Poor
168. ent and Exclusions What Is Covered Microscan Systems Inc warrants to the original purchaser that products manufactured by it will be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of one year from the date of shipment This warranty is specifically limited to at Microscan s sole option repair or replacement with a functionally equivalent unit and return without charge for service or return freight What Is Excluded This limited warranty specifically excludes the following 1 Any products or parts that have been subject to misuse neglect accident unauthorized repair improper installation or abnormal conditions or operations 2 Any products or parts that have been transferred by the original purchaser 3 Customer mis adjustment of settings contrary to the procedure described in the Microscan Systems Inc owners manual 4 Upgrading software versions at customer request unless required to meet specifications in effect at the time of purchase 5 Units returned and found to have no failure will be excluded 6 Claims for damage in transit are to be directed to the freight carrier upon receipt Any use of the product is at purchaser s own risk This limited warranty is the only warranty provided by Microscan Systems Inc regarding the product Except for the limited warranty above the product is provided is To the maximum extent permitted by law this express warranty excludes all o
169. ent communicating to a single FTP server also should be limited to prevent contention for access to the FTP server We recommend that the minimum trigger interval on a single HawkEye 1500 Smart Camera application using the QueueView FTP feature be 3 seconds For additional HawkEye 1500 Smart Cameras this minimum trigger interval should then be increased by 1 second for each HawkEye 1500 Smart Camera added For example when using 2 HawkEye 1500 Smart Cameras the interval between triggers should be a total of 4 seconds 3 seconds plus second for the additional HawkEye 1500 Smart Camera reader equals 4 seconds When using 5 HawkEye 1500 Smart Cameras the interval between triggers should be a total of 7 seconds 3 seconds plus 1 second for each of the 4 additional HawkEye 1500 Smart Camera readers 7 seconds Adding additional FTP servers and network segments should be considered to keep minimum trigger rates low 4 124 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Fine Tuning amp Monitoring Your Application The worst case bandwidth requirements on the network segment should never exceed 40 of the theoretical bandwidth If the network is 10BaseT 40 x 10 000 000 bits per second 8 bits per byte 500Kbytes second A HawkEye 1500 Smart Camera reader image is 326K bytes and a text report 15 IKbyte With FTP protocol overhead added one HawkEye 1500 Smart Camera reader s image and text report takes nearly all of the
170. entLeft ClientTop ClientWidth ClientHeight X End With 9 End Sub gt o Private Sub HookDeviInfo_Click m bHookDevInfo Not m bHookDevInfo HookDevInfo Checked m bHookDevInfo End Sub v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual F 7 Appendix Custom Programming Using a Serial Connection Private Sub HookImages_Click m_bHookImages Not m bHookImages If m bHookImages Then m bHookReports True HookReports Checked m bHookReports HookImages Checked m_bHookImages End Sub Private Sub HookReports Click m bHookReports Not m bHookReports If Not m bHookReports Then m bHookImages False HookImages Checked m bHookImages HookReports Checked m bHookReports End Sub Private Sub Compression Click Index As Integer m nCompression Index Dim i As Long For i Compression LBound To Compression UBound Compression i Checked IIf m nCompression i vbChecked vbUnchecked Next i End Sub Private Sub m connection OnDataTransferAborted m progress Value 0 m progress Visible False m bGettingReport Fals End Sub Private Sub m connection OnDataTransferPercentComplete ByVal nPercent As Integer m progress Value nPercent End Sub Private Sub m connection OnDataTransferStarted m progress Visible True m progress Min 0 m progress Max 100 m progress Value 0 End Sub Private Sub m connection OnNewRecord ByVal objReport As IOBJLib IMiCycleReport If m bGettingRep
171. eper Decode Pass Decode Fail Locate Fail Match Pass Match Fail RT Error 2 Specify the number of beeps if any you want for each condition Your Choices are OFF 1 Beep 2 Beeps 3 3 Select the Enable Beeper checkbox 4 Close the Beep Control dialog box 4 88 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner Saving Parameters on the Camera to Flash This menu item saves the current memory settings to flash so that the camera is properly restored when it reboots To save the parameters on the camera to flash 1 Press Ctrl S or select Save Parameters on Camera from the File menu 2 Click Yes when asked if you wish to control camera X ReadRunner displays the message Camera Parameters are saved to flash ReadRunner also saves the parameters to the ReadRunner ini file 3 Click OK Restoring Defaults Decoder Restoring defaults to the decoder is the same as doing an unlearn To restore the default settings to the decoder 1 From the File menu select Restore Defaults and then Decoder o c c gt oc tc 2 Click Yes when asked if you wish to control camera X ReadRunner restores the decoder settings to their defaults and saves them to Flash Application Mode Restoring defaults to the Application Mode options is the same as selecting Demo Mode e Continuous Triggers e No Retries e Illumination is on
172. eport Information The Camera Report window displays detailed information about what the HawkEye 1500 camera is reading To display the Camera Report window 1 Press Ctrl R or select Report Window from the Windows menu ReadRunner displays the Camera Report window as shown in Figure 4 10 FIGURE 4 10 ReadRunner Camera Report Window E djhawkeye1500 CTRL Camera Report X Cycles 392845 392810 Decodes 392810 Located 392825 Matches 0 Verify Total Timing ms Avg Cycle Time 171 Read Time 73 59 Proc Time 78 64 Acq Time 106 106 Other 1 Alarms Retries 0 0 Bain Exp Photo 280 5030 Decode Trigger Overruns 0 0 Avail Contig Memory MB 12 089 11 455 Overall Last 20 Read Rate 99 99 100 00 Overall Worst Reads Min 324 324 Overall Growth tc tc AIM Grade UEC Axial NU v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 15 Chapter ReadRunner PartQ Indicates whether or not the part queue is enabled a number indicates the current setting for maximum records or disabled Range Typically 0 32 for reports with images and 0 5000 for reports without images The maximum value is a function of available memory Photo Is the current photometry indicating the current setting for Gain in usec and the current setting for Exposure in dB Memory Is the current available memory the largest contiguous block of memory availabl
173. er TCP 49099 User format configurable TCP based connection Connection Uses ASCII and binary keywords IDxx CDxx etc Note that the connection is always lossless i e inline with the read cycle TCP3 User TCP 49100 User format configurable TCP based connection Connection Uses ASCII and binary keywords IDxx CDxx etc Note that the connection is always lossless i e inline with the read cycle TCP4 User TCP 49101 User format configurable TCP based connection Connection Uses ASCII and binary keywords IDxx CDxx etc 2 2 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Connectivity Note Ports COMMAND 4 use a protocol that is either ASCII or defined by you at connection time Therefore these ports are fully supported on a non Windows based Host provided the Host supports TCP IP and a socket level API Ports 49096 and 49097 use a binary format that 1s parsed into easy to use COM events and objects on the Host and is therefore only applicable to Windows based Hosts N Note You can enable disable the UDP protocol through the command line For more information see the UDP_BROADCAST command in the HawkEye 1500 Series Reference amp Programmers Manual go ao o2 OE zo pe x 6 5 or Serial Port When communicating over a serial line you need to be aware of the limitations of this communication medium and how ReadRunner and the camera handle
174. era report 4 15 chart 4 94 communications configuration 4 64 4 71 configure part queue 4 120 filmstrip recorder 4 131 io settings 4 53 4 54 4 58 learn 4 14 4 102 network overview 4 96 readrunner 4 2 report 4 15 select configuration file 4 19 4 20 images 4 129 symbology and verification 4 25 terminal 4 92 Windows Menu advanced tuning 4 104 4 109 4 113 4 115 4 116 4 117 4 118 4 119 charting window 4 94 Ctrl A 4 104 4 109 4 113 4 115 4 116 4 117 4 118 4 119 Ctrl F 4 131 Ctrl H 4 94 CtrI R 4 15 Ctrl T 4 92 F12 4 90 4 96 filmstrip recorder 4 131 network overview 4 96 report window 4 15 terminal window 4 92 Wiring examples combo io board 2 26 i o modules 2 24 input opto 2 20 2 30 output opto 2 21 2 31 power supply 2 6 ttl i o 2 33 wmr Command 6 11 Working Distance 1 5 wpr Command 6 11 Write mac register command 6 11 phy register command 6 11 X x Command 6 12 X Dimension 4 101 2 Zoom In Button 4 95 Zoom Out Button 4 95 Index 12 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008
175. ernal All Power on Test Name All Tests All Mfg Tests Tests Tests Data Line X X X X Address Line X X X X Memory Cell X X X Inverted Cell X X X Flash Bootloader X X Flash Blocks X X X X RS232 Internal X X X X Loopback Ethernet Reset X X X X Ethernet MAC X X X X Loopback Ethernet PHY X X X X Loopback Ethernet EXT X X Loopback 6 14 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 LEDS LEDS The system LEDs visually convey power on status and error codes Power on Sequence Each stage of the power on sequence drives the LEDs in a binary up count fashion according to the table below The LEDs are lit before the test is executed and remain in that pattern until the next test is run or an error condition is detected and displayed TABLE 6 3 Power on Sequence Mode Fail Pass Trig Test X Data Line Test X Address Line Test X X Flash Bootloader Test X Flash Block Test X X RS232 Internal Loopback Test X X Ethernet Reset Test X X X Ethernet MAC Loopback Test X Ethernet PHY Loopback Test Error Codes In the event of an error being detected the system beeper will sound five times and an error code representing the test that failed will flash on the LEDs The LEDs continue to flash until the QuicSet button is pressed at which point an error message is logged to the serial port and the Diagnostic Monitor is launched o o e o
176. ers in ReadRunner see Data Matrix Parameters on page 4 104 Once the system is learned you can rela the parameter constraints freely to meet the application requirements For example if the Data Matrix quality varies such that its size can increase or decrease from the learned value by over the maximum of 10 allowed by the algorithm you can set both Matrix Height and Matrix Width to Auto so that the size will no longer be constricted An alternative to setting both Matrix Height and Matrix Width to Auto is to set the Matrix Height and Matrix Width by their corresponding average valuesobtained by learning the largest Data Matrix and the smallest Data Matrix Set the Orientation parameter whenever possible If in the application the Data Matrix is always presented to the camera in the same orientation set it to the correct value instead of leaving it at Auto For more information see page 4 106 The Learn is a powerful tool and will usually succeed when applied to a Data Matrix of acceptable quality When learn fails you should determine Ifthe FOV ofthe camera is properly chosen for the application For more information see Pixel Per Cell on page 4 107 Ifthe mark quality is acceptable with one of our field proven industry leading Data Matrix quality verification products If the Learn fails due to an unsuitable FOV and such a FOV is required then use Assisted Learn to help correct the problem Generally once Assisted Lear
177. es and 4 8 9 punctuation E Format 3 500 uppercase alphanumeric characters with spaces 5 25 commas periods slashes and minuses Format 4 500 uppercase alphanumeric characters with spaces 55 Format 5 500 characters with full 7 bit ASCII keyboard Format 6 500 characters with full 8 bit ISO for international languages v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual D 7 Appendix Symbology Reference ECC 200 The data may be encoded using any combination of six encoding schemes listed in Table D 3 TABLE D 3 Encoding Schemes File Formats Encoding Bits per Data Scheme Characters Character ASCII Double digit numeric ASCII values 0 127 4 Extended ASCII values 128 255 8 16 C40 Primary upper case alphanumeric 5 33 Text Primary lower case alphanumeric 5 33 X12 ANSI X12 EDI data set 5 33 EDIFACT ASCII values 32 94 6 Base 256 All byte values 0 255 8 Table D 4 lists ECC symbol attributes TABLE D 4 ECC 200 Symbol Attributes sea Data Capacity Inter Error Max leaved Alphan Correction Correctable N Block Num um Byte Overhead Percentage Row Col Size S Cap Cap Cap 96 96 10 10 8x8 1 1 6 3 1 62 5 25 12 12 10x10 1 1 10 6 3 58 3 25 14 14 12x12 1 1 16 10 6 55 6 28 39 16 16 14x14 1 1 24 16 10 50 0 25 38 18 18 16x16 1 1 36 25 16 43 8 22 34 20 20 18x18 1 1 44
178. et Network it should take in the order of 100 to 200 msec to send an image via FTP This mechanism does not guarantee that every read cycle will be v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 123 Chapter ReadRunner saved via FTP Use Save to Memory if capturing the last N records is important without missing one Uploading using FTP with QueueView can cause lost data It was discovered that a customer with more than one HawkEye 1500 Smart Camera reader connected to an FTP server and using high trigger rates could lose a text or image file due to the limitations of a network data throughput A FTP server while capable of supporting multiple connections is not always able to handle a new connection request at a particular time and returns an ECONNREFUSED status to the HawkEye 1500 Smart Camera reader This error is detected and multiple retries are attempted to provide a very high likelihood of success We therefore recommend the following guidelines be considered when using the QueueView FTP feature The transfer of files becomes part of the decision process for determining worst case HawkEye 1500 Smart Camera reader trigger rates We recommend no less than 3 seconds between triggers with 1 HawkEye 1500 Smart Camera Triggering faster than the files can be successfully transferred will cause Decode Process Overruns with loss of data The number of HawkEye 1500 Smart Camera readers on a network segm
179. fault IO Assignment that has been pre configured uses the same physical lines that were used in earlier versions of the HawkEye software Suggested Line Definitions gt oc tc v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 57 Chapter ReadRunner Note I O points are NOT set automatically You must set them manually TABLE 4 5 Suggested Line Definitions Mode Suggested Line Definitions Data Valid Full Handshake Pass Fail DV RTE Data Valid Pipelined Pass Fail DV RTE DV 2 Line Verify Full HS DV RTE Good Poor DV 2 Line Verify Pulse DV RTE Good Poor DV 3 Line Verify Full HS DV RTE Good Fair Poor DV 3 Line Verify Pulse DV RTE Good Fair Poor Pass Fail Only Full Handshake Pass Fail DV RTE Pass Fail Only Pipelined Pass Fail DV RTE 6 Click Assignment ReadRunner displays the IO Assignment window as shown in Figure 4 44 4 58 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner FIGURE 4 44 I O Assignment Window Ed djhawkeye1500 CTRL IO Assignment OPTO_IN1 Delay Latch PD gt c p PTO OUTI OPTO_OUT2 MHighTue fran vj OPTO_OUT3 nn v High True v rz GPIO_OUT1 1 4 MHighTue GPIO_OUT2 v High True GPIO OUT3 2 v HighTme RTE rj 9 GPIO_OUT4 v High
180. ferent trigger scenarios some produce a trigger overrun condition All cases assume a trigger occurs on the rising edge In the following diagrams in T oz me x2 50 IO T Delay time T Latch time Tacqg Acquisition time v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 3 11 Chapter HawkEye 1500 Series Overview Trigger Diagram 1 In this example the acquisition cycle has time to complete before the next trigger is received There is no trigger overrun in this case 0 Ti 0 lt time between triggers FIGURE 3 1 Trigger Diagram Trigger Tacq Time Acq end 3 12 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 I O Operations Trigger Diagram 2 This example illustrates a trigger overrun condition The acquisition cycle has not completed before the next trigger is received Ta 0 Ti 0 gt time between triggers FIGURE 3 2 Trigger Diagram 2 Trigger Tac q gt in T oz E Go rw Time Acq end v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 3 13 Chapter HawkEye 1500 Series Overview Trigger Diagram 3 In this example both T4 and Tj are non zero Because lt time between triggers and T lt T there is no trigger overrun condition
181. g will be disabled When Verification is set to anything other than No Verification or AIM DPM 1 2006 a Warning message will be displayed on the dialog box indicating that changing the Exposure or Gain will uncalibrate the camera Image preprocessing will be disabled Preprocessing Images The Photometry window contains the Image Preprocessing dialog area where you can select the method forprocessing images and the number of iterations for the method as shown in Figure 4 16 Note The Iterations dialog box is displayed after you select a method 4 24 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner FIGURE 4 16 Photometry Window rschawkeye CTRL Photometry Auto Photometry Exp 2530 usec Gain 160 dB C Manual Photometry r Image Preprocessing Method ERODE 7 Iterations 1 The methods are e NONE This is the default e ERODE This method increases the dark cell size Use this method to increase the dark cell size of a dark on light Data Matrix tc tc DILATE This method increases the light cell size Use this method to increase the light cell size of a light on dark Data Matrix OPEN This method removes minor light defects of dark cells e CLOSE This method removes minor dark defects of light cells Setting Up Symbology Symbology specifies what kind of symbols
182. ghting with external strobe on GPIO 1 Strobe amp Ext Use strobe lighting with external strobe on GPIO 1 it o c c gt tc tc Power Strobe amp Ext Use power strobe lighting with external strobe on GPIO 1 On PowerStrb Ext This selection keeps the lighting on at all times but when the camera is exposing the Power Strobe intensity 1s supplied The external strobe is on GPIO 1 Usually this selection is chosen to reduce the effects of strobing that can cause adverse effects to humans when in the physical presence of the camera Retry Modes The retry mode specifies whether or not there will be multiple attempts the number of attempts and the time limit To specify the retry mode 1 Press Ctrl M or select Application Mode from the Settings menu 2 Click Yes when asked if you wish to control camera X ReadRunner displays the Application Mode window v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 49 Chapter ReadRunner From the Retry Mode pull down menu specify one of the following None Sets the read cycle to single attempt mode This is the default Time Set the read cycle to multiple attempts within the specified time limit Range 1500 60000ms Count Set the read cycle to a specified number of attempts Range 1 15 RETRY input Duration Retries will continue while the state of the assigned RETRY input line remains high Note P
183. he Command Text Box area see Figure 4 62 Note De select Display Report Output From Camera before you send remote commands to the camera To display a list of remote commands type help To display help for a specific command type help command Where command is the name of the command To display detailed information for a specific command type help command verbose Where command is the name of the command verbose specifies that you want to see detailed information Timing amp Rate Information The Chart window displays the Timing rate and Read rate of the camera To display the Charts window 1 Press Ctrl H or select Charting Window from the Windows menu ReadRunner displays the Chart window as shown in Figure 4 64 Rate data displayed and Figure 4 65 Timing data displayed 4 94 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner FIGURE 4 64 ReadRunner Charts Window Rate Data sqa001 Chart Display Rate Data Zoom Out Zoom In Read Rate Rate Last 20 This window displays rate information about the current images that the HawkEye 1500 camera is reading e Zoom In Out Zoom In displays more detail Zoom Out displays less detail Display Rate Data Displays graphically how well the camera is able to read symbols as a percentage of successful reads 10096 means zero no reads Yellow indicates overall read rate since the c
184. he option chosen FIGURE 4 70 Three Learn Windows djhawkeye1500 CTRL Learn djhawkeye1500 CTRL Learn X djhawkeye1500 CTRL Learn 1 x Leam Photometry Only Lear Photometry Only Leam Decoder Settings Only Learn Decoder Settings Only Learn Photometry And Decoder Settings Lear Photometry And Decoder Settings Assisted Leam Enable Assisted Leam Decoder and Unleam Decoder and Learn Photometry Set Photo to AUTO Learn Decoder Unlearn Decoder Photometry Set Photo to AUTO 4 Select one of the following Learn Photometry Only Specifies that the camera should learn only lighting information Learn Decoder Settings Only Specifies that the camera should learn only decoder settings Learn Photometry and Decoder Settings Specifies that the camera should learn both lighting information and decoder settings This is the default After you click Learn in the Learn window the HawkEye 1500 camera learns the information you specified 4 102 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Fine Tuning amp Monitoring Your Application Enabling Assisted Learn This command narrows down the parameters associated with a symbol by explicitly specifying the number of rows and columns and the polarity As with a learn this results in a more reliable decode of the same type of symbol In most cases it also speeds up the d
185. his chapter describes how to set up and use ReadRunner the HawkEye 1500 Graphical User Interface It also contains information about fine tuning and monitoring your application Setting Up Communications If you haven t already set up communications with the HawkEye 1500 Series Smart Camera Based Reader see the HawkEye 1500 Series Quick Start Guide o c 23 oc 75 l a Overview ReadRunner is the HawkEye 1500 Graphical User Interface From ReadRunner you can access all the features and functionality of the HawkEye 1500 camera and monitor control any camera on an Ethernet network Figure 4 1 displays the main ReadRunner window v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 1 Chapter ReadRunner FIGURE 4 1 ReadRunner Main Window ReadRunner contains menus and buttons that enable you to quickly and easily connect and set up the camera and monitor and display information ReadRunner Menus The ReadRunner menu bar contains the following menus File Menu contains the following menu items Save Parameters on Camera Ctrl S see page 4 89 Restore Defaults Decoder see page 4 89 Restore Defaults Application Mode see page 4 89 Restore Defaults Both Ctrl Z see page 4 90 4 2 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Settings Menu contains the following menu items Overview Save Camera Configuration To Fil
186. his is desired Typically when you upgrade the camera s software you upgrade only the Bootloader Registry and vx Works Kernel and you use the HawkEye Flasher to do so You can use the Flasher to upgrade your camera over the network or by using the serial port These files are installed on your hard drive in the Camera Binaries folder under ReadRunner typically C Program Files ReadRunner Camera Binaries Use the HawkEye Bootloader only when you have no network connection to the camera and your camera fails to start up Using HawkEye Bootloader The HawkEye Bootloader is a simple menu driven interface embedded on the camera that examines and updates the camera s flash memory When using the bootloader you transfer SEC files to the camera via the serial port and execute the files These SEC files automatically update the appropriate section of flash memory Note All SEC files were written to flash memory at the Microscan factory when your camera was assembled There is no specific need to re write any portions of this flash memory with the bootloader Use the bootloader to update your camera only when instructed to do so The SEC files that created your camera s software image are installed on your hard drive in the ReadRunner Camera Binaries folder The SEC files on the CD include bootloader Reader sec Bootloader image registry Reader sec Registry image vxWorks Re
187. id Full Handshake 3 22 Pass Fail Only Full Handshake 3 24 DV 2 Line Verify Full HS 3 25 DV 3 Line Verify Full HS 3 26 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual vii Contents CHAPTER 4 DV 2 Line Verify Pulse 3 28 DV 3 Line Verify Pulse 3 29 Formatted Output amp Audio 3 31 Reported Error Codes 3 32 QuicSet Symbol Photometry 3 35 ReadRunner 4 1 Setting Up Communications 4 1 Overview 4 1 ReadRunner Menus 4 2 ReadRunner Shortcut Keys 4 4 ReadRunner Buttons 4 5 Setting Up Your Application 4 7 Adding amp Taking Control of a Camera 4 7 Adding a Camera That is on a Different Subnet 4 11 Using Live Video to Align the Camera 4 12 Using Learn During Image Optimization 4 14 Displaying Camera Report Information 4 15 Resetting Camera Report Statistics 4 18 Saving amp Loading Configuration Files 4 18 Saving Configuration Files 4 19 Loading Configuration Files 4 20 Releasing Control of a Camera 4 21 Removing a Camera 4 21 Using ReadRunner 4 22 Setting Up Photometry 4 22 Preprocessing Images 4 24 Setting Up Symbology 4 25 Defining the Region of Interest 4 26 Copying Current to PID 4 28 Copying PID to Current 4 28 Setting Up Text Matching 4 29 Match List Triggered l O 4 31 Behavior of the Wildcard Match 4 40 Setting Up Serial Number Matching 4 41 Specifying 4 44 Preferences 4 44 Application Modes 4 46 Lighting 4 48 viii HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 200
188. ides two outputs that differ only in whether the match passed or failed Both PASS and MATCH FAILURE indicate that the symbol was successfully decoded READY This keyword indicates the online status of the camera This output could be used to indicate to a PLC that the camera is ready to accept commands and trigger inputs READ A This keyword configures the line as an input to trigger a read with a specified PID trigger edge latch and delay values 4 60 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner e READ B This keyword configures the line as an input to trigger a read with a specified PID trigger edge latch and delay values e READ C This keyword configures the line as an input to trigger a read with a specified PID trigger edge latch and delay values e READ D This keyword configures the line as an input to trigger a read with a specified PID trigger edge latch and delay values e RETRY This keyword configures an input line that is used with the retry mode RETRY input Duration The level of the line is tested to determine when to stop retrying e LEARN This keyword allows an external input to trigger an acquisition with a decoder and photometry learn e MATCH SET Triggers a LEARN of just the Match String it does not affect the decoder or photometry settings Supported Behaviors The supported behaviors for a given keyword name are e BOOL
189. ies User Manual 4 43 Chapter ReadRunner Specifying Preferences The Preferences window contains three tabs The Report Connectivity tab Figure 4 37 allows you to specify the rate at which report information is sent to the Reports window FIGURE 4 37 Preferences Window Report Connectivity Tab Preferences x General Image Display Report Rate Maximum Image Rate E per second When in control use maximum transfer rates DK Cancel Report Rate Specifies the rate at which data is sent to the Reports window Maximum Send report information as fast as possible per second At most send report information once per second 2 second At most send report information twice per second 4 per second At most send report information four times per second 8 per second At most send report information eight times per second Image Rate Specifies the rate at which images are sent to the camera Maximum Send images as fast as possible per second At most send an image once per second 4 44 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner 2per second At most send an image twice per second When in control use maximum transfer rates Send report information and images as fast as possible The General tab Figure 4 38 allows you to specify the format and locat
190. ion Orientation This pull down menu specifies the matrix orientation in READ mode When a Learn is performed the orientation of the Data Matrix is set to one of the orientation values shown below In Read mode the controller is optimized to find the Data Matrix whose orientation is similar to the orientation determined in Learn More specifically if the Data Matrix orientation in Read mode stays within the 23 from the learned orientation the controller will perform more reliably If the orientation of the Data Matrix can be arbitrary then 4 106 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Fine Tuning amp Monitoring Your Application you should change the orientation setting after the Learn by setting the orientation to AUTO All measurements are assumed to be rotated in a CCW direction Range 1 8 or AUTO default E E M 1 09 2 90 3 180 4 270 Vo 5 45 6 135 7 2259 8 315 Width Height Ratio This pull down menu specifies the expected width to height ratio when AUTO HEIGHT and WIDTH are selected Range 3 3 0 3 50 50 5 0 or AUTO default Read Timeout This parameter specifies the time to spend inspecting a symbol For good easy to read symbols you might set this value this value lower than the default For harder to read symbols you might set this value higher The purpose of this parameter is to minimize the time the camera takes trying to read
191. ion modes Note When Verification is set to AIM DPM 1 2006 Application Lighting and Retry Mode are disabled The remainder of this section on Application Mode describes Lighting on page 4 48 Retry Modes on page 4 49 Extended PID List on page 4 51 Read Timeout on page 4 52 Report Budget on page 4 52 Triggers on page 4 53 Advanced I O on page 4 54 Lighting The lighting type specifies what kind of lighting the HawkEye 1500 camera will be using To specify the lighting type 4 48 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner 1 Press Ctrl M or select Application Mode from the Settings menu 2 Click Yes when asked if you wish to control camera X ReadRunner displays the Application Mode window 3 Using the pull down menu specify one of the following for lighting Off Use ambient lighting On Use constant lighting This is the default Strobe Use strobe lighting Power Strobe Use power strobed lighting On w Power Strobe This selection keeps the lighting on at all times but when the camera is exposing the Power Strobe intensity is supplied Usually this selection is chosen to reduce the effects of strobing that can cause adverse effects to humans when in the physical presence of the camera External Use external lighting with external strobe on GPIO 1 On amp External Use constant li
192. ion of the save images FIGURE 4 38 Preferences Window General Tab Preferences x Image Display Report Connectivity 1 Image Save TIFF Image Save c Program Files ReadRunner ax Directory OK tc tc e Image Save Format Specifies the format of the saved image either TIFF tif or Bitmap bmp e Image Save Directory Specifies the directory for the saved image The Image Display tab Figure 4 39 allows you to specify the color of Pass and Fail information and the font font style and font size of result text v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 45 Chapter ReadRunner FIGURE 4 39 Preferences Window Image Display Tab preferences x Report Connectivity General Image Display Result Text Color OK e Pass Color Specifies the color of the information that passes Click to display the color palette e Fail Color Specifies the color of information that fails Click to display the color palette Result Text When you click Font ReadRunner displays fonts font styles and font sizes from which you can choose what the result text will look like Click Color to display the color palette Display text on top of screen Click this option to optionally have the decode strings placed at the top of the image ins
193. ion will speed up the reading process when Data Matrix has sufficient quiet zone With sufficient quiet zone a Data Matrix with irregular curved or distorted border s can be read more efficiently with the option checked The border problem typically is associated with low quality inkjet or dot peen marks or when the Data Matrix is imaged at an angle DM Ignore Single Edges Allow a more severely damaged Data Matrix to be read by sacrificing speed DM Finetune Reserved Reserved for future use Allow Steep Angle In some Data Matrix reading applications it is not possible to set up the camera such that the focal plane is in parallel with the surface of the Data Matrix label When the focal plane and the label surface form a steep angle the Data Matrix in the image will have severe geometrical distortion Enable the flag to read the distorted Data Matrix symbols Allow Severe Damage Enabling the option will increase the robustness of the software in reading Data Matrix with severe border damages To use it first perform a successful Learn on a less damaged label Then enable check the option to read labels with more border damages in Run mode DM Ensure ROI Enabling the option will ensure that no Data Matrix is located unless it is fully inside the ROI DM Decode Near Center A Data Matrix will not be decoded unless it is near the center of the FOV Default Off DM Cell Outlin
194. it There can be only one client connected to the camera In addition there can be only one channel to exchange data 1 e commands and binary data The ReadRunner UI enables a special ACK scheme that may need to be disabled once the camera has been programmed and is connected serially to a PLC or the controlling host You can accomplish this by sending special control characters see Table 2 2 TABLE 2 2 Serial Port Connectivity Control Char Function Ctrl O Turn off report output Ctrl P Toggle the state of the prompt and echo Ctrl Q Turn off command output Ctrl R Release control of the unit and put it back online Ctrl S Take control of the unit and bring it offline forcibly Ctrl T Dump the heartbeat string to the terminal Ctrl U Toggle the display of report strings on the terminal Ctrl W Turn on command output v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 2 3 Chapter Connecting to the HawkEye 1500 If the Serial port is programmed for 7 bits per character certain features of the ReadRunner UI are not supported in particular Hook Reports and Hook Images are not available as they transfer image and counters binary data and cannot be represented using a 7 bit per character ASCII format Note Regardless of whether the 7 or 8 bits per character are programmed Hook Reports and Hook Images must be disconnected before quitting the ReadRunner applicatio
195. l v2 4 1 Nov 2008 00 lroubleshooting amp Frequently Asked Questions Oo x o gt otc 55 2 5 Im This appendix contains troubleshooting tips and answers to frequently asked questions for the HawkEye 1500 Series Smart Camera Based Reader Frequently Asked Questions My camera is connected to the network and serial port but have no idea what the current communication settings are How figure it out The HawkEye 1500 can communicate via the serial port or over Ethernet to ReadRunner First try using ReadRunner and add a button for either COMI or COM2 depending on the serial port on your PC you have connected to the camera Once connected ReadRunner hooks reports and or images from the camera on a timed basis This data is transferred via Xmodem protocol If you can connect via the serial port click Settings Serial TCP Settings and examine the network and serial port configuration If ReadRunner does not connect with the serial port try using HyperTerminal provided by the operating system Run HyperTerminal and create a connection on your serial port with the following settings e Baud rate 115200 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual B 1 Appendix Troubleshooting amp Frequently Asked Questions Parity N Data bits 8 e Stop bits 1 Flow control None These are the default camera settings
196. ll verification grade as number but only when Verification is enabled e VERI STATUS This keyword returns the verification status available when Verification is enabled The possible values are 3 Good 2 Fair 1 0 No Verification Enabled 4700 Verification Process Error The decode was successful but possibly because the code was seen too close to the edge of the image all of the verification calculations could not be completed The value is also displayed in the upper left corner of the Verification Report when it occurs as shown in Figure 4 53 4 78 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner FIGURE 4 53 Value Displayed in Verification Report Fd HawkEyeE01B56 CTRL Verification Report E lol x February 18 2008 15 21 20 Print Form Aperture Aperture Exposure Bain MeanLight ECCLevel Wavelen Height error error 13842 324 error error 540 error I 15881 324 0x013 83 87 0 250 637 202 30 TRUE 75 250 4701 Verification Unsupported The decode was successful but verification is not supported for the type of barcode seen 4702 Verification Timeout The decode was successful but the verification calculations could not be completed before a new decode request was received o c gt tc tc UII ONLY UII CPN only be enabled with the keyword UI
197. llumination mode to something other than External Strobe mode 24 volts DC power fused 100mA is brought out directly from the 15 pin HD Sub header J1 to barrier strip TB1 position 1 Internal 5 volts DC is generated from the 24 volt DC source and provides logic power to the 4 General Purpose I O Optos IO1 through 104 The Smart Camera I O board accepts only 5 volt logic solid state relays Opto 22 G4 type isolator modules Note There is no connector for connecting external isolator module power 5 volts Strobe The external strobe output is a TTL signal from the camera that connects to the barrier strip TB1 position 12 STROBE via the 15 pin HD Sub header J1 and jumper JMP1 The strobe output signal has an in line Lo Pass filter with a 2Mhz cutoff There is a Strobe LED STRB that indicates whenever the strobe signal is ON high Jumper JMP1 must be set to positions 1 amp 2 to use the strobe output Note Setting JMP1 to positions 1 amp 2 will disable General Purpose I O 1 To use External Strobe the camera must be set to External Strobe illumination mode refer to either of the following v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 2 15 Chapter Connecting to the HawkEye 1500 Chapter 4 of this manual The ILLUMINATION command in the HawkEye 1500 Series Reference amp Programmers Manual Spare Fuse amp 5VOK LED There is a spare fuse in the spare
198. lure message will be reported Typically the only time you would add retry attempts is in the Stop and Scan application mode Basically you are indicating that when the triggered input occurs the part may not exactly be in the field of view so retry attempts will be made and only one report will be issued Typically you would not have time to perform retries in a motion application ISWT Inter Symbol Wait Retry ISWT is the Presentation or Supermarket Mode This duration selection is the Inter symbol wait time Inspections are performed continuously and only successful attempts are reported In order not to report duplicate data decoded from the same image a time limit the Inter symbol wait time must be specified This time limit ensures that the duplicate data is not reported until the specified time has elapsed since the last successful decode attempt In other words either of two things have to happen to get a report 1 AnISWT of failures must occur between the presentation of duplicate symbols OR 2 Youmust present a different symbol Graphically shown below where a solid thick line indicates a decode read cycle and a thin line indicated a no decode read cycle 3 8 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Retry Modes Scenario 1 Scenario 2 Successful read symbol a Report Successful read symbol Report Successful read symbol No report Successful read symbol
199. ly and CRISS CROSS is used for robustness Report Budget This parameter specifies the amount of time in msec default 1s 5 used to send results decode string image report over TCP IP It is scheduled in such a way that the read speed remains deterministic This time gets added to the processing time for every part and therefore impacts the maximum reads per second of the camera This time can be reduced when sending results via a serial connection ONLY to gain a few more PPM if necessary However be aware that the report budget is also used in Demo Mode to allow the camera to send images and reports to connected clients for the purpose of monitoring Ethernet connections Setting this parameter to zero for very fast pipeline applications may have an adverse effect on ReadRunner responsiveness and may cause it to stop receiving images and reports Therefore it is recommended that this value be set to at least 1 msec or more 4 52 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner Triggers To specify a trigger 1 Press Ctrl F6 or select Settings from the Settings menu 2 Click Yes when asked if you wish to control camera X ReadRunner displays the IO Settings window as shown in Figure 4 41 FIGURE 4 41 I O Settings Window rE dihawkeye1500 CTRL 10 Settings Trigger Use Trigger on OPTO IN 1 10 Behavior Mode Disabled
200. mote host with a unique cycle number in their file name There is no wrap around so if they are not purged on the remote host this could potentially fill up the remote disk file system When the Maximum Records is non zero the records will wrap around after the Nth one has been saved re using the file names When you select Save on remote system FTP the Host IP 1 xx xx xx xx for example 10 2 1 98 and path needs to be specified The Path uses the UNIX directory convention as directory separator Optionally Results and or Images can be saved An FTP server must be running on the destination host for this option to function The FTP Server must be configured with a Camera Account as follows User Name target o c c gt oc tc Password password The credentials of that special user must be set to have write permissions to the destination PATH entered in the Configure Part Queue form The root of the path should be restricted by the FTP Server for that account if desired Note Selecting this option will drastically impact the performance of the camera The Read Rate i e Reads sec will significantly decrease therefore this option should only be used in special tuning or debugging situation If the Reader job is triggered the camera may overrun you need to make sure that there is enough idle time between triggers to save the data via FTP For a clean 100 BaseT Ethern
201. n before connecting the camera over serial to the controlling device Output formatting settings for the serial port are available in ReadRunner under the STANDARD Tab in the Output Settings Form Rear Panel Figure 2 1 details the layout of the rear panel FIGURE 2 1 Rear Panel Layout Power Connector Field I O Connector Ethernet Connector SENET Serial Port Connector Power ON LED LE Pis A XL Ethernet LINK LED Ethernet ACT LED Quest 6 QuicSet Switch Power Connector 24VDC in e Field I O Connector DB15S 1 Opto in 3 Opto Out 4 GPIO strobe out optional on GPIO 1 e Serial Port Connector 8 pin mini DIN Ethernet Connector RJ45 Ethernet LINK LED Green Ethernet ACT LED Yellow Power ON LED Green QuicSet Switch Recessed 2 4 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Power Connector Power Connector Figure 2 2 shows the pinout of the Power connector N FIGURE 2 2 Power Connector Pinout 12 11 Table 2 3 lists the suppliers for the power connector mating connector zo D zo L d gt c 6 5 or TABLE 2 3 Power Connector Mating Connector Suppliers Supplier Part Number Description Microscan HECONNPS Housing and socket crimp Kit HIROSE RP34 8SP 3SC Housing RP34 SC 112 Socket crimp Table 2
202. n is successful the application will be robust Preprocessing with Morphology For poorly marked Data Matrices applying morphological preprocessing operations can improve the image quality and make the reading process more robust Proper use of the Erode or Dilate can help balance the size between the dark and light cells in a severely underprinted or overprinted Data Matrix symbol Use Open or Close to remove minor defects on Data Matrix cells 5 2 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Preprocessing with Morphology Erode Example Figure 5 1 shows a poorly marked Data Matrix before ERODE is applied FIGURE 5 1 Example Before Applying Erode Assume that we want to apply Erosion to increase the size of the dark cells on the light background 1 2 7 8 From ReadRunner click the Add Camera button to connect a camera Highlight the camera you want to connect and click OK Click on the newly added button for the camera you just added Click on the Take Control button Click Yes when asked if you want to control the camera you just added Click the Photometry button 5 o a tc From the Method pull down menu select ERODE From the Iteration pull down menu select 2 Figure 5 2 shows the same Data Matrix after ERODE is applied with 2 Iterations v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 5 8 Chapter Reading Difficult Symb
203. nd typing in the IP address of the camera Camera devices are automatically added to the list as they are detected on the network The last camera you selected is automatically selected when detected on the network All file selections and settings are also restored each time you run Flasher except for those cameras defined with Static IP Address The files you select with the Flasher are BIN files that is these files are binary executable images readable by the camera The files are transferred to the camera s memory and are then moved to the Flash memory Caution Before updating your camera s Registry be sure to save your camera s configuration to the hard drive using ReadRunner Otherwise the configuration will be lost The Flasher monitors this entire process When the process finishes the Flasher automatically reboots the camera and reports the new software version The Flasher also supports several command line options e When this option is given the Flasher automatically updates the last camera you selected according to the previous settings e doreg This option sets the Load Registry File option e noreg This option clears the Load Registry File option e dokernel This option sets the Load vxWorks Kernel File option e nokernel This option clears the Load vxWorks Kernel File option e dobtl This option sets the Load Bootloader option
204. network overview window 4 97 Connector DBI5S 2 8 field i o 2 8 light port 2 45 RJ45 ethernet 2 41 serial 2 39 Contrast 4 17 report 4 114 Controller network overview window 4 97 cpu Command 6 11 Ctrl A 4 104 4 109 F 4 131 F5 4 87 F6 4 53 G 4 71 H 4 94 I 4 129 tJ 4 64 4 71 M 4 46 4 49 O 4 29 4 41 P 4 22 Q 4 130 R 4 15 S 4 89 T 4 92 U 4 120 V 4 25 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual Index 3 Index Z 4 90 Current Image saving 4 129 Customer Settings Installed in Manufacturing 4 99 Cycle Reports storing 4 120 Cycles network overview window 4 97 D d Command 6 4 DATA 4 77 Data bits 4 67 regions D 11 storage area D 4 valid full handshake 3 19 3 22 4 56 pipelined 3 19 3 20 4 56 Data Matrix 8 bit binary code D 4 additional features D 11 compared to barcode D 2 components D 3 construction 1 3 encoding schemes D 7 error correction D 5 parameters cell sample 4 107 ecc level 4 106 image style 4 106 matrix height 4 108 matrix width 4 108 num columns 4 105 num datamatrix 4 105 num rows 4 106 orientation 4 106 pixels per cell 4 107 polarity 4 106 probe direction 4 108 probe speed 4 109 probe threshold 4 109 read timeout 4 107 4 111 warp type 4 106 weight height ratio 4 107 symbol structure D 11 what it is D 1 DATAHEX 4 77 DB 15S Connector 2 8 dbp Command 6 6 Debounce 3 10 Debugging 4 120 Decode backward 4 117 fail 4 85 forward 4 117 left to
205. ngs menu select Targeting Laser and then select or de select one of the following Off On 2 Second Strobe DO NOT LOOK AT THE LASER WHEN READING PARTS THAT ARE HIGHLY REFLECTIVE BE CAREFUL THAT THE LASER IS REFLECTED INTO SOMEONP S EYE Toggling the Beeper You can toggle the beeper so that you hear don t hear beeps from the HawkEye 1500 camera This overrides any settings in the Output Settings window see Output Format Strings on page 4 71 To toggle the state of the beeper do one of the following i o c me tc tc 1 Click the beeper icon see Figure 4 58 at the bottom of the main ReadRunner window FIGURE 4 58 Toggling Beeper QT ww Off Beeper On 2 From the Settings menu select Beeper Note A checkmark preceding Beeper in the Settings menu indicates that the beeper is on v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 87 Chapter ReadRunner 3 From the keyboard press Shift F5 Controlling the Beep You can control the beeper so that you hear don t hear beeps from the HawkEye 1500 camera under various conditions To control the beeper 1 Doeither of the following a Fromthe Settings menu select Beep Control b From the keyboard press Ctrl B ReadRunner displays the Beep Control dialog box as shown in Figure 4 59 FIGURE 4 59 Beep Control Dialog Box Beep Control Enable Be
206. nment of PASS FAIL AND DATA VALID to these lines is the default factory setting In V2 0 other outputs can be configured to come out on the OPTO OUTI OPTO OUT2 and OPTO OUT3 lines go o OE zo p x 6 5 or FIGURE 2 27 Output Opto Wiring Isolated Input Camera Host Host 50V 50V Input OR Input N v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 2 31 Chapter Connecting to the HawkEye 1500 FIGURE 2 28 Output Opto Wiring Isolated Relay and PLC Inputs Camera Relay Camera PLC 50V 50V PLC Tio Input a k GND FIGURE 2 29 Output Opto Wiring Non Isolated Inputs Camera Host Camera Host 24 VDC 24 VDC L Input KE r Input 5 lt ais The maximum current that can pass through the optoisolators is 50 mA Non isolation setup can cause damage to the HawkEye 1500 if excessive voltage is applied to the optoisolators 2 32 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 External I O Terminal Block Adapter Optional TTL I O Wiring Sample wiring diagrams for strobe output
207. nnection As ReportConnection Dim m bGettingReport As Boolean Dim m bInUpdateButtons As Boolean Dim m bHookReports As Boolean Dim m bHooklImages As Boolean Dim m bHookDevInfo As Boolean Dim m nCompression As Long Private Sub Form Load Set m coord New MiCoordinator Set m connection New ReportConnection m blInUpdateButtons False m bGettingReport Fals m nCompression 4 set the SerialHook timer interval SerialHook Interval 2000 SerialHook Enabled False init the menus Compression m nCompression Checked True m bHookDevInfo True HookDevInfo Checked m bHookDevInfo m_bHookImages False HookImages Checked m_bHookImages m_bHookReports Fals HookReports Checked m_bHookReports init the tabstrip m_tabstrip Tabs Clear m_tabstrip Tabs Add terminal Terminal m_tabstrip Tabs Add image Image m_tabstrip Tabs Add report Report ShowView VIEW_TERMINAL F 4 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Complete Source Code disable buttons if port is not available Dim i As Long For 1 4 btnConnect i Enabled CheckSerialPort COM amp i amp Next i Disconnect End Sub Private Sub Form Unload Cancel As Integer Disconnect Set m coord Nothing End Sub Private Function CheckSerialPort port As String As Boolean this function uses MiAsciiConnection to check if the COM port can be opened at
208. nual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 FIGURE 4 47 Communications Configuration Window Using ReadRunner Communications Configuration TEP IP Camera Name 500 MAC Address Use DHCP C Use Static IP Addressing Domain acut com IP Address f 92 168 254 3 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 0000 Camera Serial Port Baud Rate 115200 h Parity None 7 Data Bits Stop Bits 1 Flow Control None PC Serial Ports Baud Rate 15200 Ne Parity None i Data Bits Stop Bits 1 Y Flow Control None Other Options Enable Ethernet IP Cancel 3 Specify the type of IP addressing that you will be using either DHCP or static IP addressing Note If you select Use DHCP you only have to specify Camera Name and Domain If you select Use Static IP Addressing you also have to specify IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway i gt oc tc TCP IP Camera Name The name of the camera which cannot exceed 15 characters At boot time if a camera s network name is HawkEye the camera automatically changes HawkEye to HawkEyexxyyzz where xxyyzz is the last three fields of the camera s MAC address For example v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 65 Chapter ReadRunner TABLE 4 6 Unique Camera Names Camera Name
209. number of Data Matrix symbols to find Range 0 disable no look or 1 Default 1 Num Columns This pull down menu specifies the number of columns to expect in the Data Matrix symbol Range 8 144 or AUTO autoselect v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 105 Chapter ReadRunner Num Rows This pull down menu specifies the number of rows to expect in the Data Matrix symbol Range 8 144 or AUTO autoselect ECC Level This pull down menu specifies the expected Data Matrix Error Correction level Valid values are AUTO SPEC default 0 50 80 100 140 or 200 An ECC Level of 200 is the most common Polarity This pull down menu specified the polarity Valid values are e DL The Data Matrix is dark on light in the image LD The Data Matrix is light on dark in the image e AUTO The Data Matrix is either DL or LD Image Style This pull down menu selects the Data Matrix symbol image style Valid values are e NORMAL Data Matrix is imaged normally as opposed to mirrored e MIRROR A mirrored Data Matrix image is obtained e AUTO The Data Matrix is either NORMAL or MIRROR This is the default Warp Type This pull down menu specifies the matrix warping speed Valid values are e Fast The warping algorithm uses fast but less precise implementation This is the default e Slow The warping algorithm uses slow but more precise implementat
210. number of times a test is executed is configurable v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 6 1 Chapter The Bootloader Additionally utilities are provided which as a minimum can peek poke memory locations You can access the monitor through QuicSet press during power up ONLY It is also accessed if there is a POST failure Note A QuicSet boot does not run POST diagnostics FIGURE 6 1 Boot Flow 6 5 z o n N Boot Loader POST E STATUS LEDs Port j a 24 uino cl eese E FAIL EM QuicSet gt Diagnostic Monitor PASS V a P d pd 522 at C 2 N vxWorks Application D HORN ESCT c Diagnostics 212 STATUS Xu T PASS D FAIL NE C Main Application iim vea 6 2 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Boot Loader Power On Self Tests Boot Loader Power On Self Tests As each power on self test is executed a binary number representing the test in progress is displayed on the camera LEDs Should a failure be detected the beeper sounds five times and the LEDs flash out an error code until the QuicSet button is pressed A diagnostic message is sent out the serial port it s possible the message won t be seen if the failure 1s related to the RS 232 and the Diagnostic Monitor Menu is displayed QuicSet boot uses the UART t
211. o Live Photometry Learn and ROI Note You must have control of the camera to set or modify parameters This is assumed throughout the procedures in this chapter 4 10 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Setting Up Your Application Adding a Camera That is on a Different Subnet ReadRunner allows you to add a camera that is on a different subnet assuming you know the IP address of that camera Note The camera name of a camera that is on a different subnet will not appear in the Network Overview window Use the following procedure to add a camera on another subnet 1 Start ReadRunner by selecting Start Programs ReadRunner V and ReadRunner The main ReadRunner window is displayed P gt 2 Click Add Camera ReadRunner displays the Add Camera Button window as shown in Figure 4 6 FIGURE 4 6 Add A Camera Window Add Camera Button Select a camera to add i c gt tc tc Static IP Address d COMI serge he1515 uidhd152555nm workingagain sqal500_ija op4 OK Button djhawkeye1500 3 Select lt Static IP Address gt 4 Click OK v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 11 Chapter ReadRunner ReadRunner displays the Add Camera Button window with the IP Address field displayed as shown in Figure 4 7 FIGURE 4 7 Add A Camera Window Add Camera Button Select a camera to add
212. o report any POST error including RS 232 failure Default communication parameters are 115 200 N 8 1 Hard Error A hard error is defined as an error that prevents the system from running properly There are two types of hard errors e Hardware fault Invalid application block of flash If a hard error is detected the unit beeps five times and flashes the fault code on the LEDs It continuously flashes the LEDs until the QuicSet button is pressed at which time the Diagnostic Menu is displayed Bootloader Menu O The Bootloader Menu provides a series of utilities to perform various tasks HawkEye BootLoader HE1500 Ver 5 45 206MHz 32MB RAM 4MB Flash d Dump memory m odify memory dt Display tests et Execute test dbp Dump boot params mbp odify boot params am Display menu dfb Dump flash blocks der Dump enet regs wmr Write MAC reg wpr Write PHY reg cpu Dump CPU registers flsh Get Flash size o o v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 6 3 Chapter The Bootloader ram Get RAM size cach control x File transfer r Reset unit j Jump to app e Display error h Help gt gt d Dump Memory The d command dumps units by width bytes of raw data including the ASCII representation starting from address addr initial default is 0 Syntax gt gt d address units width Whe
213. o the camera To display the Terminal window v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 91 Chapter 1 ReadRunner Press Ctrl T or select Terminal Window from the Windows menu ReadRunner displays the Terminal window as shown in Figure 4 62 FIGURE 4 62 ReadRunner Terminal Window 12245 Command Text Box Program User Buttons Show Internal Messages Display Commands Sent To Camera Display Report Output From Camera Clear Terminal Window The ReadRunner Terminal window displays output from the camera commands sent to the camera and internal messages From this window you can also program five user buttons see Programming User Buttons on page 4 92 Clear Terminal Window This button clears the terminal window Display Report Output From Camera When selected this button displays output from the camera By default this button is selected when you open the Terminal window Display Commands Sent To Camera When selected this button displays commands that you send to the camera By default this button is selected when you open the Terminal window Show Internal Messages When selected this button enables the display of every response or ack from a command sent to the camera These responses are denoted with a By default the display of these responses is disabled Programming User Buttons User buttons contain
214. o time for the automatic calculation of photometry values Thus automatic photometry 1s off You must specify the exposure and gain settings manually A trigger is supplied through the I O connector to the camera by a sensor device In addition the Lighting selection will be v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 47 Chapter ReadRunner Power strobe This selection allows the parts to be moving at a very high speed where short exposure times are desired Stop and Scan This mode scans a symbol when it stops within the HawkEye 1500 s field of view A trigger is supplied to the camera by a sensing device not included as standard equipment when the symbol is in place The trigger signal is supplied through the I O connector The illumination is set to strobe and the automatic photometry is on When the trigger is applied the HawkEye 1500 camera will set the exposure and read the symbol Supermarket This is often referred to as Presentation Mode Parameters are set similarly to Demo mode except that an inter symbol wait time ISWT is imposed This means that when a symbol is presented to the HawkEye 1500 s field of view it will be read once The same symbol cannot be read again until the symbol is removed from the field of view for at least the indicated ISWT A different symbol when presented to the camera will be read immediately You may make modifications to any of these applicat
215. odes 4 AS9132 Rev A 2005 Data Matrix formerly IAQG 5 AIM DPM 1 2006 Communications Ethernet RS232 Baud rates from 1200 bps to 115 2 Kbps 1 Opto isolated input trigger 3 Opto isolated outputs 4 TTL level I O Optional TTL level strobe output Speed Up to 30 parts per second Operating 32 F to 104 F 0 C to 40 C Temperature Storage 4 F to 149 F 20 C to 65 C Temperature Humidity Up to 9595 non condensing HawkEye 1500 Dimensions Note Mechanical drawings in various formats can be found on the CD E 2 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Dimensions FIGURE E 1 HawkEye 1515 0002 0591 08705 wwe Ly 097 uugy6L 7 22 007 x Lj x 082 3 9 Ee ci MET 052 2 0056 006 6 m 88 wwggzz a o0t v xl 9s v 0571 unugg yy 77 9 5 87 M 9 82 052 2 x OTT is E 3 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Appendix Specifications FIGURE E 2 HawkEye 1525 sog g unug ty 0921 uu
216. of the algorithm may be reduced Range 2 20 Default 6 Matrix Height This pull down menu specifies the Data Matrix height Range 20 1024 or AUTO default Matrix Width This pull down menu specifies the expected matrix width Range 20 1024 or AUTO default Probe Direction This pull down menu specifies the Probe direction Valid values are e CRISS CROSS The first probe searches horizontally the second probe searches vertically the third probe searches horizontally at a different location the fourth probe searches vertically at a different location and so on until a a Data Matrix is decoded or b the search is completed within the ROI or c the Read Time out is reached This is the default HORIZONTAL All probes search horizontally at different locations until 1 a Data Matrix is decoded or b the search is completed within the ROI or c the Read Time out is reached 4 108 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Fine Tuning amp Monitoring Your Application VERTICAL All probes search vertically at different locations until 1 a Data Matrix is decoded or b the search is completed within the ROI or c the Read Time out is reached HORI VERT First performs HORIZONTAL search The VERTICAL search will not be invoked unless no Data Matrix is decoded in HORIZONTAL search Note that half of the total Read Time out value is allocated for HORIZONTAL
217. ols FIGURE 5 2 Example After Applying Erode Dilate Example Figure 5 3 shows a poorly marked Data Matrix before DILATE is applied FIGURE 5 3 Example Before Apply Dilate Assume that we want to apply Dilation to increase the size of the light cells on the dark background 1 2 From ReadRunner click the Add Camera button to connect a camera Highlight the camera you want to connect and click OK Click on the newly added button for the camera you just added Click on the Take Control button Click Yes when asked if you want to control the camera you just added Click the Photometry button 5 4 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Reading Different Difficult Symbols From the Method pull down menu select DILATE 8 From the Iteration pull down menu select 1 Figure 5 4 shows the same Data Matrix after DILATE is applied with 1 Iteration FIGURE 5 4 Example After Applying Dilate A a E 4 E FI Reading Different Difficult Symbols If an application requires reading different types of Data Matrix symbols and the reading with the default decoder parameters does not produce satisfactory results you can create several jobs each containing a learned parameter for each type of the symbol When a new image is acquired the reader will try to decode the image with the parameter set stored in the jobs one at a time until a successful decode is achieved
218. on to do single Match String or MatchList i o c gt tc Note After Enable MatchList is selected the single Match String is removed from the dialog as it is no longer used v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 35 Chapter ReadRunner FIGURE 4 27 Adding Match Strings Ed Match Mode Setup Text Matching EnableText Matching Enable MatchList 1 12345648 2 123456ab 3 1i2345486 7 4 123 56 5 123456BC 6 123456CD 7 123456DE 123 6DE Note Wildcanid characters are and r Serial Number Matching Enable Serial Number Matching The commands generated from the above settings are T 0011 IATCH LIST ENABLE ON ATCH LIST 1 123456AB ATCH LIST 2 123456ab ATCH LIST 3 12345AB6 ATCH LIST 4 123 56AB LIST 5 123456BC ATCH LIST 6 123456CD ATCH LIST 7 123456DE ATCH LIST 8 123 6DE ATCH LIST 9 1 6DE IATCH LIST 10 DE LIST 11 lATCH LIST 12 lATCH LIST 13 W IATCH LIST 14 W lATCH LIST 15 W 4 36 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner FIGURE 4 28 Serial Number Matching Match Mode Setup r Text Matching EnableText Matching Enable MatchList 1 123456 9 1 6DE 2 12345
219. onsistent with a trigger signal it will virtually trigger the acquisition 4 68 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner The camera also supports a vendor specific static Assembly object to represent camera results The ID of this object is 300 vendor specific and supports the Get Attribute Single service ID OxOE or the Set Attribute Single service ID 0x10 for attribute ID 3 The attribute gets sets an array of bytes The total structure size is 376 bytes or 94 long words 30 long words 256 bytes of decode data The bytes are described in Table 4 8 TABLE 4 8 CycleReport Assembly Data Bytes Long Word Bytes Meaning 1 1 4 User defined keyword value 2 5 8 Count of triggers 3 9 12 Count of passes 4 13 16 Count of failures 4 5 17 20 Count of successful locates 6 21 24 Count of failed locates 7 25 28 Count of successful decodes o 8 29 32 Count of failed decodes 9 33 36 Count of successful matches 10 37 40 Count of failed matches 5 11 41 44 Count of alarms 12 45 48 Count of trigger overruns 13 49 52 Count of decode overruns 14 53 56 Count of acquisition timeouts 15 57 Pass 1 Fail 0 58 Located 1 Not Located 0 59 Decoded 1 Not Decoded 0 60 Matched 1 Not Matched 0 0 if matching is not active 16 61 64 Detailed Decode Failure 17 65 68 Overall AIM Verification Grade v2 4 1 No
220. opriately may cause the Learn Barcode to fail 4 112 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Fine Tuning amp Monitoring Your Application Min Threshold The barcode threshold out of 255 grayscale Supported with the BARTHRESH terminal command Range 5 100 Default 18 A Confidence 0 100 For barcodes that do not use checksum such as Code 39 I 2 of 5 Codabar and BC412 the threshold value can help reduce potential misdecodes The default value is 0 meaning that any possible decode is accepted When the value is raised a certain number of decodes must agree before the decode is declared successful On the other hand if the value is set too high then a normally decodable but imperfect barcode may not be decoded Supported with the BARCONF terminal command VERT default Range 0 100 Default 0 Probe Direction Enables you to set the direction of the search 5 HORI amp VERT tc VERT HORI Supported with the BARPRB terminal command BC Decode Near Center A barcode will not be decoded unless it 1s near the center of the FOV Supported with the BC DECODE NEAR CENTER terminal command which is part of the FINETUNE terminal command Default Off Expert Settings To modify expert settings parameters 1 Press Ctrl A or select Advanced Tuning from the Windows menu 2 Select Expert Settings in the pull down window Rea
221. ord 4 5 6 7 8 For ECC200 if any cell within the codeword is incorrectly identified the codeword is subsequently affected by that bit and thus requires error correction Since it is the codeword that matters in the error correction algorithm one single D 6 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Data Matrix bit can cause the same amount of damage as the eight wrong bits in the same codeword For example if one bit within the codeword is in error the entire codeword is in error Likewise if multiple bits within the same codeword e g 2 8 bits are in error this still counts as one codeword in error The HawkEye 1500 is designed to cover both ECC200 and non ECC200 Data Matrices Data Matrix Encoding Schemes This section describes ECC 000 140 and ECC 200 ECC 000 140 The data is encoded using one of six encoding schemes format strings The encoding scheme is fixed for the entire symbol As a result the selection of the most appropriate encoding scheme allows you to compress the symbol to its smallest form without wasting space on characters not used Table 0 2 lists the D six encoding schemes and their outputs TABLE D 2 Encoding Schemes Format Strings o 2 Encoding Bits per Data Scheme Format Outputs and Description Character gt Format 1 500 numeric characters 0 9 with spaces 3 5 2 Format 2 500 uppercase alphabetic characters with spac
222. ormat sqa001 000001173 tif File Extension Cycle Number Camera Name Saving the Current Image To save the current image press F9 or select Save Current Image from the File menu ReadRunner saves the current image in the Images folder within the 4 ReadRunner folder The file name of the saved image has the following format sqa001_000001173 tif File Extension Cycle Number Camera Name c c gt oc Loading Image Files to the Camera If the camera fails to read an image you can save that failed image onto the PC see Configuring the Part Queue on page 4 120 and then load the image back to the camera for debugging purposes To load an image file to the camera 1 Press Ctrl I or select Load Image Files To Camera from the File menu 2 Click Yes when asked if you wish to control camera X ReadRunner displays the Select Images window as shown in Figure 4 85 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 129 Chapter ReadRunner FIGURE 4 85 Select Images Window Select Images 12 x Look in Images E3 dihawkeye1500 000384660 History d Desktop My Documents Files of type images m Open as read only My Network P File name ft www Em 2 3 Navigate to the appropriate folder select the file s you want to load onto the
223. ort Then F 8 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Complete Source Code m image NewRecord objReport m report NewRecord objReport m bGettingReport Fals m progress Value 100 m progress Visible False End If End Sub Private Sub m tabstrip Click Select Case m tabstrip SelectedItem Key Case terminal ShowView VIEW TERMINAL Case image ShowView VIEW IMAGF Case report ShowView VIEW REPORT End Select End Sub Private Sub SerialHook Timer If Not m connection IsConnected Then Exit Sub If Not m bGettingReport Then If m bHookDevInfo Then update the device info manually Dim dev As MiDevice Set dev m coord DeviceFocusGet If m bHookReports Then create a REPORTREO command string m bGettingReport Tru dev RefreshInfo m countTotal Caption dev CountCycle m countPassed Caption dev CountPassed e m countFailed Caption dev CountCycle dev CountPassed S Else m countTotal Caption m_countPassed Caption m countFailed Caption End If e 7 E S D E 9 0 5 o Dim cmd As String cmd REPORTREQ Select Case m nCompression v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual F 9 Appendix End If End Sub Custom Programming Using a Serial Connection Case 1 cmd Case 2 cmd Case 3 cmd Case 4 cmd Case 5 cmd cmd
224. ot want to do a re acquire as the part would move on without trying the other PIDs In this case you would want to run without acquire so that all the PIDs are tried on the one image and then give one final result v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 51 Chapter ReadRunner PID List w Acquire is used in situations where various manual photometry settings are saved in different PIDs and a new image needs to be taken before the decoding process is started Read Timeout This parameter specifies the time to spend searching and decoding a symbol 1 Data Matrix or Barcode If Data Matrix reading is enabled regardless of whether or not Barcode reading is enabled the Read Timeout must be set in either of two ways When Probe Direction for Data Matrix is set to default HORI VERT or VERT you must set Read Timeout based on the following scenario If the Data Matrix and Barcode reading takes x milliseconds to complete set Read Timeout to at least 2 times the time in milliseconds This allows the vertical probe to fail and the horizontal probe to complete successfully HORIZONTAL only VERTICAL only or CRISS CROSS you must set Read Timeout based on the following scenario If the Data Matrix and Barcode reading takes x milliseconds to complete set Read Timeout to at least 1 time the time in milliseconds Note When vertical is enabled VERT and VERT HORI are ignored internal
225. ow data is stored in 8 bit format Each encoded data character can be represented by an 8 bit binary code The character M for example is 01001101 Dark cell 0 Light cell M Stored in the Data Matrix as shown in Figure D 4 D 4 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Data Matrix FIGURE D 4 Data Matrix Storage M 01001101 The Quiet Zone is a clear white space surrounding the Data Matrix without clutter or text of any kind The width of the quiet zone must be at least the size of one cell The quiet zone should be at least 1096 of the width or height of the symbol in order to achieve an optimum read rate Data Matrix Error Correction Error correction provides safeguards and additional capabilities for handling poorly printed or damaged symbols You select Error Correction Codes ECC when you encode the Data Matrix symbol Data Matrix 1s the only symbology which offers both Reed Solomon ECC 200 and Convolutional error correction codes ECC 000 140 Reed Solomon is a byte correcting scheme preferred for block damage recovery Convolutional code is a bit correcting scheme preferred for random damage recovery With the proper choice of Error Correction Code for a given environment a high rate of decoding can be achieved o A tc gt 92 2 Q gt o In Convolutional code as the ECC level increases data redundancy is added to the Data Matrix
226. p Recorder from the Windows menu ReadRunner displays the Filmstrip Recorder window as shown in Figure 4 86 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 131 Chapter ReadRunner FIGURE 4 86 ReadRunner Filmstrip Recorder Window cibcamera Filmstrip Recorder Passed Failed Type of Images to Save Display New Images Stop Display Of New Images Record Images to Disk 2 Specify the following Record Images to Disk When you click this button ReadRunner begins saving files to the ReadRunner directory on the PC Note This button will continue to flash to remind you that you are in record mode Stop Display Of New Images Click this button to temporarily stop displaying and recording images in the Filmstrip Recorder Display New Images Continue displaying and recording images if the record button is flashing Type of Images to Save Specifies the type of images ReadRunner saves Passed Failed Failed Only Passed Only to the ReadRunner folder on the PC 4 132 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 capras Reading Difficult Symbols This chapter explains how to use your HawkEye 1500 Series Smart Camera Based Reader to read difficult and damaged symbols For a detailed Data Matrix description see Appendix D Symbology Reference General Reading Guidelines e Always attempt to create a balanced properly contra
227. p the ControlLogix PLC to communicate with the Camera via Ethernet IP Output Format Strings The output format string specifies the text that the camera sends out the serial port and over TCP for various conditions Pass Fail Error and whether or not the camera beeps with each condition To display the Output Format String window 1 Press Ctrl G or select Output Settings from the Settings menu 2 Click Yes when asked if you wish to control camera X ReadRunner displays the Communications Configuration window as shown in Figure 4 48 FIGURE 4 48 Output Format Strings Window Standard i o c gt tc tc configure Formatted Output Standard TCP2 Enabled Header Trailer Decode Pass DATA OD OA Decode Fail Locate Fail Match Pass Code Matched O0DX0A Match Fail NO MATCH ErrorxODNDA RT Error Overrun Erro ODADA Fixed Buffer Length for 57 30 Enabled v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 71 Chapter ReadRunner Standard Camera Serial Port By default this port is programmed as shown in Figure 4 49 TCPI By default this port is programmed as shown in Figure 4 49 FIGURE 4 49 Output Format Strings Window Port 49098 Ei Configure Formatted Output Standard 2 rCP4 Enabled Header Trailer Decode Pass DA
228. parameters 1 Press Ctrl A or select Advanced Tuning from the Windows menu 2 Select Data Matrix Fine Tune in the pull down window ReadRunner displays the window shown in Figure 4 75 FIGURE 4 75 Advanced Window Data Matrix Fine Tune iJ sqa1500_001 Tune Camera Undo Auto Learn Auto Learn Parameters Position Enhance Enabled Intensity Enhance Enabled No Quiet Zone Clutter DM Ignore Single Edges DM Finetune Reserved DM Allow Steep Angle DM Allow Severe Damage DM Ensure AOI DM Decode Near Center DM Cell Outline Position Enhance Enabled Enabling this will instruct the algorithm to locate the four corners of the Data Matrix more precisely and in general reduce the number of error correction used for severely underprinted or overprinted symbols The default is Off ntensity Enhanced Enabled Designed to overcome dramatic intensity variation over the matrix border area For example certain poorly marked Data Matrix may have some cells that are almost invisible compared to the rest of the cells Without enabling the option the system may issue a status code indicating a certain edge cannot be found Enabling the option will help read this type of Data Matrix more consistently The default is Off v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 115 gt tc tc Chapter ReadRunner No Quiet Zone Clutter Enabling the opt
229. pecifies the speed at which the selected COM port will operate Range 600 to 115200 e Parity Is None Odd or Even Data Bits Is 7 or 8 e Stop Bits 1 or2 Flow Control Is None Xon Xoff or Hardware Ethernet IP Connectivity Note Enabling Ethernet IP directly impacts the network and should not be enabled casually on a non manufacturing network Contact your manufacturing network administrator before adding Ethernet IP devices The HawkEye 1500 supports Ethernet IP connectivity using an implementation of a Generic Device according to the Ethernet IP Specifications from the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association The corresponding terminal command is EIPENABLE Y N ON OFF This option is stored in the BOOTPARAMS section of flash To enable disable Ethernet IP click to select de select the Enable Ethernet IP checkbox see Figure 4 47 Note You must reboot the camera for this action to take effect v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 67 o c c gt oc tc Chapter ReadRunner The camera identifies itself as a Generic Device type 0 It supports a series of objects that reflect the physical I O as well as the CycleReport data of the camera The Ethernet IP objects allow access to individual points or to groups of points The camera has 8 I O points as shown in Table 4 7 TABLE 4 7 Camera I O Point Assignments Bi
230. plain Adding amp Taking Control of a Camera Because the HawkEye 1500 camera is a network device you must connect to it before adjusting parameters or displaying detailed information To add connect a camera and take control of it 1 Adding amp Taking Control of a Camera on page 4 7 Using Live Video to Align the Camera on page 4 12 Using Learn During Image Optimization on page 4 14 Displaying Camera Report Information on page 4 15 Saving amp Loading Configuration Files on page 4 18 Releasing Control of a Camera on page 4 21 Removing a Camera on page 4 21 Start ReadRunner by selecting Start Programs ReadRunner V2 4 and ReadRunner The main ReadRunner window is displayed i o tc tc Click Add Camera ReadRunner displays the Add Camera Button window as shown in Figure 4 2 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 7 Chapter ReadRunner FIGURE 4 2 Add A Camera Window Add Camera Button E Select a camera to add serge he1515 uidhd152566nm workingagain sqal500_ija op4 buildlabcam myers1510 101 M OK Button djhawkeye1500 3 Highlight the camera you want to add Note In Figure 4 2 COMI and COM2 are the COM ports on your PC Ifa HawkEye 1500 camera is attached to COMI of your PC select COM1 If a HawkEye 1500 camera is attached to COM2 of your PC select COM2 If the camera is on a diffe
231. ppendix HawkEye 1510 Figure A 2 shows light mount bracket HELTMA 1L with NER Doal 50 attached FIGURE A 2 Light Mount Bracket HELTMA 1L with NER Doal 50 iil _ 2 00 15081 4 25 108 0 ADJUSTMENT Figure 3 shows light mount bracket HELTMA 1L with NER DF 150 3 dark field illuminator and mounting bracket attached A 4 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 gt External Lighting Mounting Options FIGURE A 3 Light Mount Bracket HELTMA 1L with NER DF 150 3 a __ uw T z o 2 x gt 2 00 50 81 425 108 01 ADJUSTMENT TABLE A 3 HawkEye Light Mount Assembly Brackets Part Numbers Description External Lighting Brackets for On Axis Lights HELTMA 1L Adjustment range 156 7mm 6 17 HELTMA 1S Adjustment range 100 1mm 3 94 Compatible with NER DF 100 and DF 150 series Dark Field llluminators Note DF 150 3 requires NER mounting bracket part number 090 000100 HELTMA 2L Adjustment range 156 7mm 6 17 HELTMA 2S Adjustment range 100 1mm 3 94 Compatible with NER R 100 V2 series Ring HELTMA 3L Adjustment range 156 7mm 6 17 HELTMA 3S Adjustment range 100 1mm 3 94 Compatible with NER R 60 V2 series Ring Illuminators v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual A 5
232. queue information 4 127 Region of Interest 4 26 registry Reader sec C 2 Release Button 4 6 Releasing Control of a Camera 4 21 Remote Commands sending to camera 4 94 Remove Button Button 4 21 Remove CS Display 4 117 4 118 4 119 Removing a Camera 4 21 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual Index 9 Index Report budget 4 52 cell unit 4 114 connectivity tab 4 44 contrast 4 114 displaying information 4 15 rate 4 44 window 4 15 Reports displaying over serial connection 4 91 Reset Unit Command 6 13 Resetting Statistics 4 18 Resolution 1 4 4 100 Restore Defaults application mode 4 89 decoder 4 89 decoder and application mode 4 90 Result Text 4 46 RETRY 4 61 input duration 4 50 Retry count 3 7 gpio 3 7 iswt 3 8 mode count 4 50 none 4 50 retry input duration 4 50 specifying 4 50 time 4 50 time 3 7 RJ45 Ethernet Connector 2 41 ROI button 4 26 defining 4 26 RT Error 4 86 S Save all images 4 127 current image 4 127 images 4 127 bmp 4 125 as bitmap 4 128 as tiffs 4 128 in camera memory 4 122 method 4 122 on remote system FTP 4 123 results txt 4 125 Saving camera configuration to file 4 19 current image 4 129 parameters on camera 4 89 Select configuration file window 4 19 4 20 image folder 4 127 images window 4 129 Selecting Symbologies 4 100 SEMI D 1 Semiconductor Equipment amp Materials International D 1 Sending remote commands to camera 4 94 Serial adapter cable 2 39
233. r Optional 2 27 External I O Terminal Block Connectors 2 27 I O Interface Connector 15 Connector HDB Sub 2 27 Signal Distribution Terminal Block 2 28 Field I O Wiring Examples 2 30 Input Opto Wiring 2 30 Output Opto Wiring 2 31 TTL I O Wiring 2 33 External I O Terminal Block Adapter Cable Optional 2 34 External Strobe amp Sensor 2 36 Serial Connector amp Serial Adapter Cable 2 39 Ethernet 2 41 Power amp Ethernet LEDs 2 42 Mode Status LEDs 2 43 Verification LEDs 2 44 Beeper 2 44 QuicSet 2 44 Front Panel HawkEye 1510 2 45 Light Port Connector 2 45 vi HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Contents Mounting Blocks 2 47 Optional Location for Mounting Block 2 47 CHAPTER 3 HawkEye 1500 Series Overview 3 1 Unique Camera Names 3 3 Application Modes 3 3 Demo 3 3 Motion 3 4 Stop and Scan 3 4 Supermarket 3 4 Lighting Modes 3 4 Retry Modes 3 6 Time 3 7 Count 3 7 GPIO IN 4 Duration 3 7 ISWT Inter Symbol Wait 3 8 PID List 3 9 PID List w Acquire 3 10 Light 3 10 HawkEye 1500 I O Operations 3 10 Trigger Behavior 3 10 Trigger Diagrams 3 11 Trigger Diagram 1 3 12 Trigger Diagram 2 3 13 Trigger Diagram 3 3 14 Trigger Diagram 4 3 15 Trigger Diagram 5 3 16 Trigger Diagram 6 3 17 Triggering the Unit Inputs 3 17 Physical Triggers 3 18 Virtual Triggers 3 18 Additional Physical Triggers Available 3 19 Outputs 3 19 Data Valid Pipelined 3 20 Pass Fail Only Pipelined 3 21 Data Val
234. r bar code symbols DO NOT LOOK AT THE LASER WHEN READING PARTS THAT ARE HIGHLY REFLECTIVE BE CAREFUL THAT THE LASER IS NOT REFLECTED INTO SOMEONF S EYE When the laser beams are centered on the symbol a series of beeps will be heard The beeps have thr tones Low Signals that the symbol is in the field of view A Middle Signals that the symbol is close to optimal read position High Signals the optimal position The three LEDs above the blinking Mode LED correspond to the three beeps With poor alignment there are no LEDs flashing and there is no beeping As the alignment improves the LEDs begin to illuminate from bottom to top and beeping begins Atoptimal alignment all the LEDs are flashing and beeping is at its highest intensity 3 Slightly move the HawkEye 1500 until the high intensity beep is achieved lock down the camera s position then press the QuicSet button once to exit QuicSet mode You will hear three short beeps and the Mode LED will return to steady on This indicates that the HawkEye is ready to read using the QuicSet mode settings 4 Insert a paper clip into the hole marked QuicSet and press once Any time after hearing a beep press the QuicSet button again to exit The Photometry value Gain and Exposure have been determined 3 36 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 CHAPTER 4 ReadRunner T
235. r edge during which new trigger edges will be ignored e Debounce The ability to ignore switching noise that may look like multiple triggers This is now handled by the LATCH time Note that while the impact of noisy switching and spurious signals may be disabled during the LATCH time addressing the root cause of these problems in the process Is vital to assuring that only trigger signals are seen at the camera and that 3 10 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 I O Operations these are the only signals that the cameraresponds to Past attempts at trying to debounce the line in the camera by looking at the selected edge and seeing if the new level is maintained for a period of time defeated the fundamental goal of triggering the acquisition when the selected edge was seen Due to the sampling frequency of a digital line debouncing made it possible to ignore real triggers or classifying noise as a valid trigger both while deferring the trigger some indeterminate time into the future Trigger Overrun This results when the time between triggers is less than the time it takes the camera to complete an acquisition cycle However even with the time between triggers is greater than the acquisition time 1t 1s possible to generate a trigger overrun condition by specifying a delay time that creates more than 100 pending triggers Trigger Diagrams Figure 3 1 through Figure 3 6 illustrate dif
236. r shortcut keys TABLE 4 1 ReadRunner Shortcut Keys Key Ctrl A Description Advanced Tuning see page 4 104 Ctrl B Beep Control see page 4 88 Ctrl F Filmstrip Recorder see page 4 131 Ctrl F6 IO Settings see page 4 54 Ctrl G Output Settings see page 4 71 Ctrl H Charting Window see page 4 94 Ctrl I Load Image Files To Camera see page 4 129 Ctrl J Serial TCP Settings see page 4 64 Ctrl M Application Mode see page 4 46 Ctrl O Match Mode Settings see page 4 29 Ctrl P Photometry see page 4 22 Ctrl Q Use Camera for Acquisition see page 4 130 Ctrl R Report Window see page 4 15 Ctrl S Save Parameters on Camera see page 4 89 Ctrl T Terminal Window see page 4 91 Ctrl U Configure Part Queue see page 4 120 Ctrl V Symbology and Verification see page 4 25 4 4 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Overview TABLE 4 1 ReadRunner Shortcut Keys Continued Key Description Ctrl Z Restore Defaults to Decoder amp Application Mode see page 4 89 F2 Verification Report see page 4 96 F7 Save Camera Configuration To File see page 4 18 F8 Load Camera Configuration To Camera see page 4 18 F9 Save Current Image see page 4 129 F12 Network Overview see page 4 96 Shift F5 Toggle Beeper see page 4 87
237. r words if the retry count is set to 10 and the decode is successful on the 7th attempt only one Success report and signal will be sent from the HawkEye 1500 If the HawkEye 1500 fails on the 10th attempt only one Failure message will be reported Typically the only time you would add retry attempts is in the Stop and Scan application mode Basically you are indicating that when the triggered input occurs the part may not exactly be in the field of view so retry attempts will be made and only one report will be issued Typically you would not have time to perform retries in a motion application GPIO IN 4 Duration You may specify that if the Decode attempt of a symbol fails the HawkEye 1500 will retry while the GPIO input line with the assigned tag RETRY see Advanced I O on page 4 54 is present The HawkEye 1500 will perform automatic photometry if selected and capture a new image and then attempt to decode the symbol again The HawkEye 1500 will report only one success or one failure no matter how many times the retry is attempted In other words if v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 3 7 Chapter HawkEye 1500 Series Overview the GPIO signal is on for 10 seconds and the decode is successful on the 7 attempt only one Success report and signal will be sent from the HawkEye 1500 If the HawkEye 1500 fails after 10 seconds and the signal is removed only one Fai
238. ra Based Reader It also contains information about application modes lighting modes retry modes and I O operations For verification information see the HawkEye 1500 Series Verification Manual in T 0 2 me x2 Go rw The HawkEye 1500 has a wide variety of applications ranging from reading symbols on parts speeding by on a conveyer to stationary applications where each symbol is manually presented The HawkEye 1500 has a rich set of options for dealing with different triggering lighting and I O situations ReadRunner the HawkEye 1500 Graphical User Interface provides a simple way of setting up all the various parameters In particular it presents a small number of application modes each of which pre sets the various parameters based on common usage scenarios These application modes are merely starting points any parameter can be subsequently altered if necessary For more information see Application Modes on page 3 3 Control over exposure of acquired images is referred to as photometry The HawkEye 1500 provides both manual and automatic photometry The auto photometry mode is quite powerful and can adjust the exposure and gain separately for each image acquisition For more information see QuicSet Symbol Photometry on page 3 35 and Setting Up Photometry on page 4 22 For situations where the symbol may be moving or difficult to decode several different retry modes are
239. racter Position i 3 Specify the following Start Count This is the starting serial number ncrement This indicates by how much the serial number will increase each time it is encountered First Character Position This indicates where in a string the actual serial number begins Last Character Position This indicates where in a string the actual serial number ends For example assume a part number looks like the following ABCDEFG123456 101 Last Character Position First Character Position Note Serial match supports 9 digits 4 42 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner Figure 4 35 shows the correct settings for serial number matching assuming a serial number that increments by one each time FIGURE 4 35 Serial Number Matching Window Mode Setup 3 x Text Matching EnableText Matching r Serial Number Matching Enable Serial Number Matching Start Count 101 Increment 1 First Character Position Last Character Position I i7 After serial number matching is enabled your Camera Report window will look similar to the one displayed in Figure 4 36 tc tc FIGURE 4 36 ReadRunner Camera Report Window Cycles 194 133 61 Decodes 194 0 Located 134 0 Serial Number Matching enabled Matches 133 61 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Ser
240. rameters This button automatically learns the parameters for the current image Undo Auto Learn This button unlearns parameters and resets them to their defaults Num Barcodes This pull down menu specifies the number of barcodes to decode Range 0 or 1 Default 1 A Horizontal Spacing This pull down menu specifies the horizontal spacing 4 110 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Fine Tuning amp Monitoring Your Application Range 8 256 Default 16 Vertical Spacing This pull down menu specifies the vertical spacing Range 8 256 Default 16 Read Timeout This parameter specifies the time to spend inspecting a symbol For more complete information see Read Timeout on page 4 52 Range 0 9999ms Default 600ms 4 Min Barcode Height This pull down menu specifies the minimum height of the barcode Range 4 400 2 Default 4 E Max Barcode Height This pull down menu specifies the maximum height of the barcode S tc Range 4 400 Default 400 Min Barcode Length This pull down menu specifies the minimum length of the barcode Range 20 600 Default 20 Max Barcode Length This pull down menu specifies the maximum length of the barcode Range 20 600 Default 600 Min Barcode Width This pull down menu specifies the minimum barcode width v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Serie
241. rcode parameters bc decode near center 4 113 confidence 4 113 horizontal spacing 4 110 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual Index 1 Index max barcode height 4 111 max barcode length 4 111 max barcode width 4 112 max number of bars 4 112 min barcode height 4 111 min barcode length 4 111 min barcode width 4 111 min number of bars 4 112 min quiet zone length 4 112 min threshold 4 113 num barcodes 4 110 probe direction 4 113 vertical spacing 4 111 Baud Rate 4 66 4 67 BC Decode Near Center 4 113 Beeper turning on and off 4 87 Behavior of wildcard match 4 40 Binary Code D 4 Bit Versus Codeword D 6 Blocks mounting 2 47 BOOL 4 61 Bootloader C 2 bootloader_Reader sec C 2 Broken Border D 4 Budget Report 4 52 Buttons add camera 4 6 4 7 4 11 color 4 46 details 4 98 display rate data 4 95 timing data 4 96 font 4 46 learn 4 14 4 102 programming user 4 92 readrunner 4 6 refresh network 4 97 release 4 6 remove button 4 21 show internal messages 4 92 take control 4 6 turbo live 4 12 unlearn 4 104 zoom in 4 95 zoom out 4 95 Byte Oriented Error Detection and Correction Algorithm D 6 Cable external i o terminal block adapter 2 34 serial adapter 2 39 cach Command 6 12 Camera adding 4 7 when on a different subnet 4 11 disconnecting from 4 21 name 4 65 unique 3 3 releasing control of 4 21 removing 4 21 report window 4 15 resolution 4 100 selecting correct 1 1 serial port baud rate 4
242. re e width Specifies how wide the display field should be in bytes byte 2bytes 4 bytes initial default units Represents the amount of data to be displayed initial default is 16 d 0x00100000 256 1 00100000 00 03 1 52 00 09 2a 00 00 03 1 a0 30 00 5 91 Eae Renee aos ene 05 00100010 04 93 0 04 10 08 2 81 38 02 el a0 3b 40 2 83 Ws we die uei 8 00100020 28 43 el a0 38 23 1 a0 00 00 1 53 ff f6 3a ff 00100030 30 04 5 95 04 93 0 04 00 00 54 00 04 1 00 00100040 20 48 e5 9f 1f 60 e3 a0 00 3c e5 9f 10 01 e2 81 H Paste e 00100050 fa c2 eb ff 00 04 el 0 0 51 eb 04 00 0 e5 85 MN buy die ree vods 2 00100060 00 00 e3 50 00 04 0 00 20 04 el a0 10 00 al 00100070 Of 00 eb 04 00 00 e3 a0 a8 30 9 1b Oc 40 e3 al 6 4 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Bootloader Menu eae seen 0 00100080 02 58 2 80 a8 30 9 1b 02 2c 00 11 ff d4 00 10 00100090 02 64 00 11 cO 04 el a0 48 10 9 2d 0 04 2 4c doe DATE 00100080 40 00 1 a0 00 00 e3 54 00 04 1 00 20 34 e5 9f Eel esee usate 4 00100000 1f 5 e3 a0 00 30 e5 9f 10 03 2 81 fa a7 eb ff Aedes adis 001000c0 10 00 e3 a0 20 50 1 44 00 04 el aO 21 82 el a0 00100040 20 18 2 82 0e 7 eb 04 00 04 el a0 0 38 eb 04
243. rent subnet see Adding a Camera That is on a Different Subnet on page 4 11 4 Click OK ReadRunner adds a new camera button to the left of the Add Camera button as shown in Figure 4 3 4 8 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Setting Up Your Application FIGURE 4 3 New Camera Button Added 4 no camera ReadRunner File Settings Windows Help Result of Camera Button 5 Select the camera you want to control 6 Click Take Control ReadRunner displays the following screen FIGURE 4 4 you wish to control the camera Window ReadRunner i E Do you wish to control the camera sqa001 tc 7 Click Yes when asked if you wish to control camera sqa001 ReadRunner displays a screen similar to the one in Figure 4 5 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 9 Chapter ReadRunner FIGURE 4 5 Taking Control Window with New Buttons Displayed Ej rschawkeye CTRL ReadRunner File Settings Windows Help chase Add Camera Release Turbo Live Photometry Leam New Buttons ROI Total Pass 2 ICTRL 29 10024M Notice that after you take control of a camera the Camera Selected button becomes the Camera Locked button 01 Also notice the new buttons displayed on the screen Turb
244. rid m report e A timer control called SerialHook e A progress bar called m progress F 2 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Code Walkthrough The two main objects used are declared at the top of frmMain A MiCoordinator m coord is used to make connection easier by using its DeviceFocusSet method A ReportConnection object is used to represent the connection to the device When DeviceFocusSet is called the ReportConnection will automatically be connected or disconnected and fire the OnConnectionReset event The sample code is not very long and should be easy to follow It uses the SerialHook timer to do most of the work When a COM button is pressed btnConnect Click Index m coord DeviceFocusSet is called with the button caption as the device name This will cause the m connection OnConnectionReset event to occur If connected the SerialHook timer 1s enabled The SerialHook Timer event first gets the current Device from the MiCoordinator using the DeviceFocusGet method This is so that the dev RefreshInfo method can be used to query the camera for the DevicelInfo There are three mode switches used by the SerialHook m bHookDevInfo m bHookReports and m bHookImages If m bHookDevInfo is TRUE then dev RefreshInfo is called to get the DeviceInfo and the counts are written to the colored labels Hooking Images is really just a special case of Hooking Reports If m bHookReports is TRUE then a REPORTREQ
245. right 4 117 pass 4 85 right to left 4 117 string display at top of screen 4 46 DECODE FAILURE 4 60 Defaults restoring 4 89 4 90 Delay 3 10 Demo Mode 3 3 4 47 der Command 6 10 DETAILED 4 77 Details Button 4 98 dfb Command 6 10 DILATE Method 4 25 Disconnecting from a Camera 4 21 Display boot parameters command 6 6 command help command 6 13 commands sent to camera 4 92 cpu registers command 6 11 decode string at top of screen 4 46 ethernet registers command 6 10 flash blocks command 6 10 last logged error command 6 13 menu command 6 9 new images 4 132 rate data button 4 95 remove optional cs 4 117 4 118 4 119 report output from camera 4 92 system flash size command 6 12 system ram size command 6 12 test menu command 6 5 timing data button 4 96 Displaying barcode parameters 4 109 commands sent to camera 4 92 Index 4 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 data matrix parameters 4 104 images over serial connection 4 91 output from camera 4 92 rate information 4 94 report information 4 15 reports over serial connection 4 91 timing information 4 94 DM allow severe damage 4 116 steep angle 4 116 cell outline 4 116 decode near center 4 116 ensure roi 4 116 ignore single edges 4 116 dm Command 6 9 Domain 4 66 dt Command 6 5 Dump Memory Command 6 4 DV 2 line verify full hs 3 19 3 25 4 56 2 line verify pulse 3 20 3 28 4 56 3 line verify full hs 3 19 3 26 4 56 3 line verify pulse 3 20 3 2
246. rix symbol consists of data regions which contain nominally square modules set out in a regular array In larger ECC 200 symbols data regions are separated by alignment patterns The data region is surrounded by a finder pattern and as a result is surrounded on all four sides by a quiet zone border o o A tc gt 92 9 Q gt o The Finder Pattern is a perimeter to the data region and is one module wide Two adjacent sides left and lower sides forming the L shaped boundary are solid dark lines These sides primarily determine physical size orientation and symbol distortion The two opposite sides are made up of alternating dark and light modules Primarily these define the cell structure of the symbol but can also assist in determining physical size and distortion With regard to Symbol Sizes and Capacities e 000 140 symbols consist of an odd number of rows and columns Symbols are square with sizes from 9x9 to 49x49 modules not including quiet zones These symbols can be recognized by the upper right corner module being dark For an image of reversed polarity 1t would be light Complete attributes for ECC 000 140 symbols are provided in the AIM and ISO Specification v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual D 11 Appendix Symbology Reference 200 symbols consist of an even number of rows and columns Some symbols may be square with sizes from 10x1
247. s User Manual 4 111 Chapter ReadRunner Range 1 100 Default 1 Max Barcode Width This pull down menu specifies the maximum barcode width Range 1 100 Default 100 Min Number of Bars This pull down menu specifies the minimum number of the bars Range 2 100 Default 2 Max Number of Bars This pull down menu specifies the minimum number of the bars Range 2 100 Default 100 Enable Barcodes When you click this parameter ReadRunner displays the Symbology Verification Window Select the barcodes you want enabled Min Quiet Zone Length The minimum length of the Quiet Zone If for any reason the quiet zone is less than the default value in the image due to camera setup restrictions the Min Quiet Zone Length parameter can be decreased in order for the algorithm to accept shorter space as quiet zone On the other hand if the barcode is big in the FOV such that some space between two adjacent bars exceeds the value specified in the Min Quiet Zone Length then there is a possibility that this space will be detected as possible quiet zone To avoid this situation the Min Quiet Zone Length can be increased Supported with the BARQZ terminal command Range 5 100 Default 12 Note Do not adjust Min Quiet Zone Length unless you understand how the change will affect the system performance Since Learn Barcode uses the parameter values specified in above dialog box setting these values inappr
248. s User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner Each channel can be setup individually each with their own Header and Trailer strings A detailed list of all keywords can be found in the next section Format String Keywords ANGLE This keyword expands to the orientation in degrees 0 to 359 of the code that was read CHECKSUM This keyword expands to the Checksum of the characters in the appropriate Output Format String where the CHECKSUM keyword Is inserted The two character ASCII value representation of the Hexadecimal checksum for example 2E is substituted in the Output string The checksum is calculated as the Exclusive OR XOR of all the characters up to the CHECKSUM keyword including the Header and the Trailer characters if CHECKSUM is placed at the end of the trailer string DATA This keyword will be substituted with the actual decoded string For example if 4567321 were decoded and the event were set as OKDEC This is the decoded data DATA 0d 0a then the one line of output will be followed by carriage return and line feed DATAHEX This keyword converts the decode data to a hex character string similar to the previous OUTPUT FORMAT HEX functionality o c c gt oc oc DETAILED This keyword returns a detailed failure string PID This keyword returns the PID number of the PID that successfully decoded the symbol T
249. s any alarms trigger overruns or process overruns Currently any alarm that is set is network related connection was dropped connection timed out etc Locate Fail When checked send the data in the text box out the serial port on every unsuccessful locate Match String A string to use for matching a decoded symbol For example if you are reading a serial number you would use matching to validate that the decoded symbol matched against a certain string Wildcards are supported single character Any preceding or following characters Match Pass When checked send the data in the text box out the serial port on every successful match Match Fail When checked send the data in the text box out the serial port on every unsuccessful match Toggling the Target Laser The target laser helps you to align and adjust the position of the HawkEye 1515 and 1525 cameras To toggle the state of the target laser do one of the following Click the target laser icon see Figure 4 57 at the bottom of the main ReadRunner window FIGURE 4 57 Toggling Target Laser v Laser Off Target Laser On Target Laser Pulse Mode From the Application Mode window select or de select one ofthe following from the Target Laser pulldown menu Off 4 86 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner On Strobe 2 sec From the Setti
250. s bin to assure consistency unless explicitly told not to in the HawkEye 1500 Release Notes 8 Click Update Flasher stores the files in the flash memory of the camera This process takes about 40 seconds v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual C 7 Appendix Kel Upgrading Camera Software C 8 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 APPENDIX D Data Matrix Data Matrix Certification Symbology Reference This appendix contains a description of Data Matrix information about programming through the reader and symbol samples Data Matrix has been certified by AIM Inc Automatic Identification Manufacturers and ISO as a fully public domain symbology It is located on the Internet at http www iso org which provides the complete specification c o tc gt 92 Q gt o e ISO IEC 16022 2006 Information Technology Automatic identification and data capture techniques Data Matrix bar code symbology specification Data Matrix has also been selected as a standard for 2D marking by a majority of industry organizations such as Department of Defense DoD Unique Identification UID program Semiconductor Equipment amp Materials International SEMI Electronics Industries Association EIA Air Transport Association ATA Automotive Industry Action Group AIAG and Health Industry Business Communication Council HIBCC What Is
251. search and half for VERTICAL search This is the default e VERT HORI First performs VERTICAL search The HORIZONTAL search will not be invoked unless no Data Matrix is decoded in HORIZONTAL search Note that half of the total Read Time out value is allocated for HORIZONTAL search and half for VERTICAL search Probe Speed This pull down menu specifies the Probe speed Valid values are NORMAL default OVERDRIVE or TURBO Probe Threshold This pull down menu specifies the Probe threshold o Range 5 100 2 Default 18 tc Barcode Parameters To modify Barcode parameters 1 Press Ctrl A or select Advanced Tuning from the Windows menu 2 Select Barcode Parameters in the pull down window ReadRunner displays the window shown in Figure 4 73 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 109 Chapter ReadRunner FIGURE 4 73 Advanced Window Barcode Parameters dihawkeye1500 CTRL Tune Camera x Barcode Parameters sf 5 Num Barcodes lUndo Auto Lear Horizontal Spacing Auto Learn Parameters Vertical Spacing Read Timeout Min Barcode Height Max Barcode Height Min Barcode Length Max Barcode Length Min Barcode Width Max Barcode Width Min Number of Bars Max Number of Bars Enabled Barcodes Min Quiet Zone Length Min Threshold Confidence 0 100 Probe Direction VERT BC Decode Near Center DFF Auto Learn Pa
252. sink max External I O Terminal Block Adapter Cable Optional Figure 2 34 shows the wiring for the external I O terminal block adapter cable 2 34 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 External I O Terminal Block Adapter Cable Optional FIGURE 2 34 External I O Adapter Cable CABLE SHIELD 2 2 2 3 3 o 4 4 oZ 5 5 6 6 _ 5 if 7 Ty Ox 8 8 9 9 oF 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 WIRE 26AWG L 7 CONN DETAIL CONN DETAIL 10 A Ra NU 10 15 eeecec 11 5 eeeem 1 15 ev 0 HDB 15M PIN OUT HDB 15M PIN OUT v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 2 35 Chapter Connecting to the HawkEye 1500 Table 2 16 shows the part numbers for the terminal block adapter and cables TABLE 2 16 I O Terminal Block Adapter amp Cable Part Numbers Microscan P N Description 990 0056 1 Adapter HD SUB 15 connector to terminal block 966 0183 1 Cable HD SUB 15 connector M M 10 Feet 966 0183 2 Cable HD SUB 15 connector M M 15 Feet 966 0183 3 Cable HD SUB 15 connector M M 25 Feet External Strobe amp Sensor For continuous mo
253. srpyy 0522 uiu 12S 927 66 9 L 9627 uwu6y 999 umole 32018 ONILNNOW 15 000 2 0805 09 7 9061 0991 unuL6 Ly 30018 ONILNNOW WNOLLdO ds 1 052 f hd 9 qat 006 0962 6 65 6 6 06 88 189 uus LL 006 98 22 0 9 ovg z 22 Lai i v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual E 4 HawkEye 1500 Dimensions FIGURE E 3 HawkEye 1510 2 WWE6 9 0002 08 09 097 90 6 0871 NF osz 2 sal 6 axa 002 uwgo s 007 6 6 298 6 86 5 6 87 wuez zz 8 052 UI HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Appendix Specifications FIGURE E 4 HEBMA 5 Standard Mounting Block replaces HEBMA 1
254. stance is the distance from the front of the light to the symbol Typically it is dictated by whatever clearance is required for part handling between the HawkEye 1500 camera and the part These standoff distances vary from a low of 3 inches 76 2mm to a high of 5 inches 127mm with the HawkEye 1515 and the HawkEye 1525 If you have different standoff distance requirements the HawkEye 1510 camera should be used o c 5 5 Lud 5 D c O 9 Selecting A Lens Standard Lens Selection Chart Table 1 1 shows the different magnifications for the HawkEye 1515 and HawkEye 1525 with built in lenses Each type has a specific Working Distance Field of View and Minimum Cell Size To determine the correct type 1 Determine the Cell Size for your Data Matrix Do this by measuring the size of your Data Matrix in the horizontal direction and by counting the number of cells in the horizontal direction Cell Size Matrix Size H Number of Cells H 2 Determine the overall field of view required to contain the Data Matrix Quiet Zone and to allow for the positioning of the symbol 3 Look in the chart to see which types have a Minimum Cell Sizes less than your cell size Example Assume a Data Matrix has 23 cells in the horizontal direction is 0 75 19 05mm wide and with a quiet zone is over 1 125 28 58mm wide 0 75 19 05 Cell Size s 0 033 0 84mm The only HawkEye T
255. sted Data Matrix image e Minimize the geometrical distortion of the Data Matrix with proper camera alignment e Choose a model with appropriate FOV such that the reported cell size after the learn is between 5 and 10 pixels per cell e When appropriate preprocess the image Erode and Dilate are helpful for poor dot peen types of images 5 o a G tc fLearn is not successful use Assisted Learn If Assisted Learn is unsuccessful improve the mark and image quality first Further Explanation Although the algorithm with default parameters is capable of reading a variety of different images for a typical application that involves only one type of Data Matrix always apply a learn to narrow down the reading parameters By constricting the parameters such as Num Columns Num Rows ECC Level v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 5 1 Chapter Reading Difficult Symbols Polarity Image Style Matrix Height and Matrix Width to a specific value the algorithm will quickly reject any Data Matrix like objects that don t fit the profile described by the parameters and get to the Data Matrix of the interest quicker This ensures that the reading time is more consistent Furthermore knowing these parameters the algorithm will not have to compute them but simply confirm them This saves time and improves robustness These parameters can be displayed in the Advanced Window Data Matrix Paramet
256. symbol as well as increased overhead OVHD in ECC 000 140 Additionally as the ECC levels increase the physical marked area increases proportionally The redundant data 1s randomly placed encoded inside the data storage area to increase the symbol s ability to recover from damage In Reed Solomon code the OVHD varies and is based on the size of matrix See Table 0 4 ECC 200 Symbol Attributes on page D 8 for more information v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual D 5 Appendix Symbology Reference The examples in Figure D 5 illustrate Data Matrices with different ECC levels and how ECC affects symbol density FIGURE D 5 Data Matrix Examples with Different ECC Levels e 000 050 080 100 140 200 Data 123456789 Format 1 Table D 1 shows the correlation between ECC levels and required overhead TABLE D 1 ECC Levels vs Required Overhead Selected ECC Levels Required Overhead 00 0 50 25 80 33 100 50 140 75 200 Various Bit Versus Codeword The ECC200 Data Matrix uses a byte oriented one Codeword error detection and correction algorithm The non ECC200 uses a bit oriented algorithm Each ECC200 Data Matrix consists of multiple codewords Each codeword contains 8 bits also called elements or cells as shown in Figure 0 6 FIGURE D 6 Shows 8 Bits as 1 Codeword 112 8 bits 1 codew
257. t Instance Point Opto In 1 trigger Opto Out 1 Opto Out 2 Opto Out 3 TTL I O 1 TTL I O 2 TTL 1 03 OD on AJ O N TTL I O 4 The I O static objects are Discrete Output Object class code 9 instance 1 8 This object supports the Get Attribute Single Set Attribute Single common services and the Value attribute ID 3 Status data is not supported This object allows the client to access specific values of I O Data is read returned as individual bytes zero or non zero For I O points programmed as inputs on the camera values are virtually represented on the camera but the physical inputs themselves remain unchanged You cannot write the camera outputs only the camera inputs Assembly Object class code 4 instance 44 This object gets the current state of the I O points as a single byte as listed in Table 1 It supports Get Attribute Single service ID OxOE for attribute ID 3 Assembly Object class code 4 instance 34 This object gets or sets the current state of the I O points to from a single byte as listed in Table 1 It supports Get Attribute Single service ID OxOE or the Set Attribute Single service ID 0x10 for attribute ID 3 As with the DIO object above I O points that are programmed as physical inputs to the camera are represented in software and can be changed by you For example if the s w detects a transition on Opto In 1 c
258. tation or exclusion may not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which may vary from state to state Tel 425 226 5700 Fax 425 226 8250 helpdesk g microscan com Contents PREFACE Welcome xv Purpose of This Manual xv Manual Conventions xv CHAPTER 1 Configurations 1 1 Selecting the Correct HawkEye to Read Your Data Matrix 1 1 Data Matrix Construction 1 3 Selection Criteria 1 4 Resolution 1 4 Field of View 1 4 Working Distance 1 5 Selecting ALens 1 5 Standard Lens Selection Chart 1 5 Custom Lens Selection 1 6 Selecting Lighting 1 6 Standard Light Selection 1 6 HawkEye 1515 1 7 HawkEye 1525 1 8 HawkEye XL details 1 8 Custom Light Selection 1 9 HawkEye 1510 1 9 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual Contents CHAPTER 2 Connecting to the HawkEye 1500 2 1 Connectivity 2 1 TCP IP Port 2 1 Serial Port 2 3 Rear Panel 2 4 Power Connector 2 5 Power Supply Wiring 2 6 Field Connector 2 8 Grounding Tab Optional 2 11 Expansion Module Optional 2 13 Using the I O Expansion Module 2 14 I O Expansion Module Connectors 2 16 I O Interface Connector J1 2 16 Opto In Opto Out amp Strobe Output Terminal Block TB1 2 17 General Purpose I O Terminal Block TB2 2 19 Field I O Wiring Examples 2 20 Input Opto Wiring 2 20 Output Opto Wiring 2 21 General Purpose I O Wiring 2 24 External I O Terminal Block Adapte
259. tc so to truly restore all settings to factory defaults use the RESET ALL command and reboot the camera This restores all decoder settings application mode settings and communication settings to the defaults The camera s name changes back to HawkEyexxyyzz where xxyyzz is the last three octets of the camera s MAC address and DHCP is activated When should use DHCP DHCP is a useful protocol for dynamically addressing client computers using TCP IP However there are some warnings as well DHCP usually requires clients to renew addresses over a period of time This can cause client addresses to change at any time depending on how your network is configured The problem is if you are receiving data from your HawkEye 1500 over TCP IP and the Ethernet address of either the PC or the camera changes you will lose connectivity to the camera and need to re establish it This can mean loss of data to the client If your application requires that you cannot lose data do not use DHCP Work with your IT department to statically assign addresses to both the PC and the HawkEye 1500 so they do not change addresses v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual B 3 Appendix Troubleshooting amp Frequently Asked Questions have no idea what the current settings are for the camera What do I do Should you encounter a situation where you have no idea what the current settings on the camera are you can reset th
260. tead of over the decoded symbol This allows images to be inspected for defects Application Modes The application mode specifies the basic setup that the HawkEye 1500 camera will use for reading To specify the application mode 1 Press Ctrl M or select Application Mode from the Settings menu 2 Click Yes when asked if you wish to control camera X ReadRunner displays the Application Mode window as shown in Figure 4 40 4 46 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner FIGURE 4 40 Application Mode Window djhawkeye1500 CTRL Application Application Demo v Continous Triggers Retries Illumination is On uto Photometry Lighting On Target taser off Retry Mode None Read Timeout msec Report Budget Trigger Use Trigger on OPTO IN 1 Advanced 10 tc tc 3 Select one of the following modes Note When you change the Application mode a dialog box will be displayed asking you to confirm the changes corresponding to the new Application mode Demo This mode demonstrates the capabilities of the HawkEye 1500 camera Settings include continuous triggers no retries illumination constantly on and auto photometry Motion This mode scans a symbol when it moves within the HawkEye 1500 s field of view Because the parts are in motion there is n
261. ther warranties express or implied including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and Technical support questions may be directed to helpdesk microscan com Register your product with Microscan www microscan com register fitness for a particular purpose Microscan Systems Inc does not warrant that the functions contained in the product will meet any requirements or needs purchaser may have or that the product will operate error free or in an uninterrupted fashion or that any defects or errors in the product will be corrected or that the product is compatible with any particular machinery Limitation of Liability In no event shall Microscan Systems Inc be liable to you or any third party for any special incidental or consequential damages including without limitation indirect special punitive or exemplary damages for loss of business loss of profits business interruption or loss of business information whether in contract tort or otherwise even if Microscan Systems Inc has been advised of the possibility of such damages Microscan Systems Inc s aggregate liability with respect to its obligations under this warranty or otherwise with respect to the product and documentation or otherwise shall not exceed the amount paid by you for the product and documentation Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages or limitations on an implied warranty so the above limi
262. there is a relatively small limit to the number of images that can be stored so only the most recent images will be available to the QueueView application If you are tracking down a failure that occurs infrequently this is the preferred method of obtaining debugging images since you are guaranteed not to miss the failure Filmstrip Recorder can only record images that are transferred to the PC at whatever rate will not slow the operation of the HawkEye 1500 This will not be every image so this is not an appropriate way to track down a rare failure since you may miss it entirely However the only limitation for the number of images stored is the free disk space available This may be a more appropriate method for a statistical sampling of failures over a relatively long period of time Also you may find it more convenient to use the Filmstrip Recorder asa quick image storing mechanism versus setting up the Part Queue and using Queue View To maximize the Filmstrip Recorder see Preferences on page 4 44 it o c c me tc tc By default the Filmstrip Recorder stores 25 image records in memory This can consume a sizable amount of memory When connecting multiple ReadRunners to monitor different cameras on the same PC it is recommended that at most one Filmstrip Recorder be active for a System with 128MB of memory To display the Filmstrip Recorder window 1 Press Ctrl F or select Filmstri
263. tings on page 4 113 e Data Matrix Fine Tune on page 4 115 e BCA12 Parameters on page 4 116 e QR Code Parameters on page 4 117 e Code 39 Parameters on page 4 118 20f5 Parameters on page 4 119 e UPC Parameters on page 4 119 Data Matrix Parameters To modify Data Matrix parameters 1 Press Ctrl A or select Advanced Tuning from the Windows menu 2 Select Data Matrix Parameters in the pull down window ReadRunner displays the window shown in Figure 4 72 4 104 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Fine Tuning amp Monitoring Your Application FIGURE 4 72 Advanced Window Data Matrix Parameters rschawkeye Tune Camera x oe Unlearn Num Rows aura Auto Learn Parameters Level auro Data Matrix Parameters 1 Num D atamatrix Num Columns AUTO Polarity auro Image Style auro Warp Type FAST Orientation aura Width Height Ratio auro Read Timeout 600 Cell Sample 5 Pixels per Cell 5 Matrix Height auro Matrix Width auro Probe Direction CRISS CROSS Probe Speed NORMAL Probe Threshold 8 tc tc Auto Learn Parameters This button automatically learns the parameters for the current image Undo Auto Learn This button unlearns parameters and resets them to their defaults Num Datamatrix This pull down menu specifies the maximum
264. tion or high speed indexing applications an external strobe and sensor may be required to freeze each part before the image can be acquired The strobe unit may include a fiber optic light pipe When choosing your part sensor you must consider the time interval between the part passing into the sensing zone and an electrical signal being generated When there is a large variation in process speed considerable apparent motion of the part within the FOV may result The HawkEye 1500 can compensate for this motion over a considerable range However the sensor should be fast enough to minimize this apparent shift To connect your sensor and strobe refer to Figure 2 35 and Figure 2 36 Figure 2 35 shows the I O Expansion Module Sensor and Strobe Connections shown with a fiber optic sensor an SCM 1 strobe controller and a 24 volt power supply 2 36 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 External Strobe amp Sensor FIGURE 2 35 I O Expansion Module Sensor and Strobe Connections 2 Jumper v N os 719 le er 5 m Blue Brown Sensor Cable espe be d gr N SENSER US White Sink lor gt mih eo 8 Strobe Cable E 4 ours Flash gt qe 5 c a S Flash ES ot H H S Np 9 Sensor SM312 AS MP50 xx
265. ts of images and results in a ring buffer This can consume most of the camera memory and can fragment memory Memory will be fragmented whenever the Part Queue is cleared and the queue is cleared either when the images are uploaded or cleared in QueueView From QueueView you can also upload the records without clearing the Queue To avoid this memory fragmentation upload the Queue without clearing it the Queue will continue to reuse its records and performance will not be impacted Do the version numbers have to match Yes For proper operation the version of the software displayed in the Network Overview Window must match the ReadRunner revision used to connect to the camera Starting with V2 0 ReadRunner is now capable of communicating and controlling V1 0 and V1 1 camera software What s the timing for normal strobe and power strobe I m assuming that both strobe modes would go off immediately after the trigger or the configured delay and then stay on for some fixed duration Is that correct What s the duration Is the duration different for each strobe mode The timing is identical for the Strobe and Power Strobe The difference is the light intensity output In Power Strobe the LEDs are overdriven and therefore brighter The duration is controlled by the Exposure setting and is limited to a maximum of 1 msec for Power Strobe as opposed to 20 msec for Strobe B 6 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008
266. turning on and off 4 86 TCP Settings 4 64 Terminal Window 4 92 Text Matching setting up 4 29 TIMESTAMP 4 77 Timing Information displaying 4 94 Tool Tip 4 93 Trailer 4 85 Trigger Overrun 3 11 Triggered I O match list 4 31 Triggers physical 3 18 virtual 3 18 Troubleshooting B 1 TTL I O Wiring 2 33 Turbo Live Button 4 12 Type of Images to Save 4 132 U UEC 4 17 UII ONLY 4 79 UII WITH INFO 4 80 Undo Auto Learn 4 105 4 110 Unique Camera Names 3 3 Unlearn Button 4 104 Unused Error Correction 4 17 UPC as EAN output 4 120 Upgrading camera software C 1 C 5 Upload Part Queue clear from camera 4 127 Use camera for acquisition 4 130 dhcp 4 66 static ip addressing 4 66 trigger on opto in 1 4 53 User Buttons programming 4 92 V VERI 1 IAQG 4 77 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual Index 11 Index VERI DETAIL 4 78 VERI FORMATTED 4 78 VERI GRADE 4 78 VERI STATUS 4 78 Verification license is it installed 4 98 set to AIM DPM 1 2006 4 24 anything other than no verification or AIM DPM 1 2006 4 24 no verification 4 24 Verify 4 128 Version Number displaying readrunner 4 98 Vertical Spacing 4 111 Virtual Triggers 3 18 vxWorks Reader sec C 2 W Warp type 4 106 Weight Height Ratio 4 107 When in control use maximum transfer rates 4 45 Wildcard Match behavior of 4 40 Window about readrunner 4 98 add camera button 4 7 4 11 4 12 advanced tuning 4 104 4 109 application mode 4 46 cam
267. ual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner string matches string string matches string string matches string string matches Xstring Setting Up Serial Number Matching The Camera Report window Figure 4 33 displays detailed information Cycles Decodes and Locates and so on about what the HawkEye 1500 camera is reading FIGURE 4 33 ReadRunner Camera Report Window n dihawkeye1500 CTRL Camera Report Cycles 392845 392810 35 Decodes 392810 15 oc Located 392825 20 Serial Number Matching disabled Matches 0 0 E If you also want to display detailed information about the number of passed and failed serial number matches you have to specify detailed information in the Match Mode Setup window To set up serial number matching 1 Press Ctrl O or select Match Mode Settings from the Settings menu ReadRunner displays the Match Mode Setup window as shown in Figure 4 34 2 Click to enable Enable Serial Number Matching ReadRunner displays the Enable Serial Number Matching text box Figure 4 34 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 41 Chapter ReadRunner FIGURE 4 34 Serial Number Matching Window Mode Setup E gt Text Matching EnableText Matching r Serial Number Matching iv Enable Serial Number Matching Start Count Increment First Character Position Last Cha
268. ustom Programming Using a Serial Connection 2 Image and 3 Report The colored labels below the buttons show total cycles and passed and failed counters as obtained by querying the DeviceInfo When first started only the DeviceInfo is hooked and therefore the colored counters will be updated By selecting various choices in the Options menu you can hook Images or Results as well as turn off the DeviceInfo hook You can also select different image compression amounts A progress bar appears at the bottom of the window during upload of Reports or Images Code Walkthrough Project References HawkEye Reader Object Type Library Project Components Microsoft Windows Common Controls 6 0 HawkEye Reader ActiveX Library e ReadRunner ActiveX Library The code consists of a single form called frmMain On this form the following items are placed COM buttons are a control array of checkboxes whose Style property is set to Graphical so that they appear as buttons This is an easy way of making buttons that stay depressed when you press them In the sample they are named btnConnect index Three labels called m_countTotal m countPassed and m countFailed These will be updated using the Device Info A TabStrip control named m tabstrip with the Placement property set to tabPlacementBottom e On top of the TabStrip are placed a Terminal control m terminal an MilmageView control image and a ReportG
269. v 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 69 Chapter ReadRunner TABLE 4 8 CycleReport Assembly Data Bytes Continued Long Word Bytes Meaning 18 21 69 87 Decode Data as a set of numbers when possible Numbers are converted as sets of 9 digit decimals up to four total numbers 22 29 88 128 Reserved for future use 30 120 Length of decode data 31 94 124 376 256 bytes of formatted decode data When setting the attribute only the user defined keyword value is persistent The data is restored on the next cycle The camera also supports custom assembly objects for combining camera I O and cycle data as well as for receiving camera commands These objects are e Assembly Object class code 4 instance 1 This object gets the current state of the I O points as well as all the cycle data This object supports I O connectivity and update with the PLC implicitly The data format is a series of DINTs The first byte of the first DINT represents the I O as listed in Table 1 The other bytes are currently ignored The rest of the DINT data represents the cycle data as listed in Table 2 except for the formatted decode data and its length This object thus has 30 DINTS of data It also support Get Attribute Single service ID OxOE for attribute ID 3 Assembly Object class code 4 instance 2 This object sets the current state of the I O points and also allows you to program the user keyword in the c
270. valid CPN Invalid UII amp Invalid LBN UII ERROR xxxx 30P ERROR xxxx UII ERROR xxxx PNR ERROR xxxx ERROR 240 ERROR xxxx UII ERROR xxxx 30T ERROR xxxx Original decoded data Notes 1 The error messages xxxx are listed in Table 3 6 Report Error Codes on page 3 32 v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 81 o c c 23 oc tc Chapter ReadRunner 2 DFI DF7 If the UII CPN field is 15434 ERROR DF1 DF7 are filled in with an empty string Otherwise the fields are used to display data elements If there are less than seven data elements an empty string is filled in at the end If there are more than seven elements only first seven elements are displayed 3 There is a space between UII and CPN in both tables UII 12345678 CPN 87654321 4 constructed UII type can be Contruct 1 Contruct 2 Construct 1 2 IUID EQUIVALENT 5 The constructed CPN type can be PNR 30P or 240 The constructed LBN type can be 30T Keyword Example Assume that you want to display formatted verification data every time there is a successful decode You would do the following 1 Start ReadRunner 2 Click Add Camera to connect to a camera 3 From the Settings menu click Output Settings 4 Click Yes when asked if you wish to control camera X With the Decode Pass as V
271. way gateway Valid IP address Domain Name domain ASCII string Enable UDP Announce eua 0 or 1 ConsoleTTY tty 0 1 or2 Baud Rate baud 115200 57600 38400 19200 9600 4800 2400 Parity parity 0 1 or2 Data Bits data 7 0r8 Stop Bits stop 0 1 or2 Flow Ctrl flow 0 or 1 EIP Enable eip 0 or 1 Load Job load 0 or 1 Run Job run 0 or 1 Speaker spkr 0 or 1 TCP Command tcpcmd TCP Lossy tcploss TCP Lossless tcpless TCP PLC tcpplc Heartbeat tcphb 6 Heartbeat Q tcphbq SNTP Intval tcpint SNTP Server tcpsvr ASCII string 5 g dm Display Menu e The dm command displays the Bootloader Menu g d Syntax gt gt dm v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 6 9 Chapter The Bootloader dfb Display Flash Blocks The dfb command displays the contents of the flash block headers Syntax gt gt dfb The output is as follows Block CRC Size Erase Count Name 0 F85F 00011A4C 000000ab bootloader 1 BAF5 0000 22 00000026 registry 2 D417 0000E74F 00000007 fpga 3 1D4B 0001 00 00000001 settings sec 4 C560 00000238 0000000c bootparams sec 5 8B43 001638FC 00000015 vxWorks der Display Ethernet Registers The der command displays the contents of the Ethernet MAC PHY registers Syntax gt gt der 0 3400 1 7809 2 0016 3 840 4 Olel 5 0000 0504 0200 0000 0000 0404 0000 1210 PHY Registers 16 0022 17 ff00 18 4080 T9 ffG0
272. will cease to search the list This is an important point in that if the first match string is all decoded strings will match it and the resulting index will always be 1 Note Always put the most specific match strings at the start of the Match List Enable or disable the MATCH LIST using the MATCH LIST ENABLE command Enter entries to the MATCH LIST using the MATCH LIST command For more information about these commands see the HawkEye 1500 Series Reference and Programmers Manual Typical entries for a situation where four parts are to be identified by the last two entries in the decoded string using unique IO lines would be MATCH LIST 1 MATCH LIST 2 CD MATCH LIST 4 EF MATCH LIST 8 GH The following entry will turn on GPIO 1 2 3 and 4 when a match is found MA CH LIS MA CH LIS 15 BOO wa n Clears the entry at index n The MATCH LIST ENABLE and MATCH LIST settings are part of the configuration file hcf file that can be saved or uploaded to the camera 4 32 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner FIGURE 4 24 MATCH BIT Keyword Assignment fJhawkeyee005e9 CTRL 10 Assignment x OPTO_INI Delay Latch PD 0 OUT1 High True Pss BOOL OUT2 High True FAIL BOOL OUT3 High True
273. x Assy 24 Volt Power Supply 966 0183 1 030 008400 030 008800 Hawkeye 1510 I O Expansion Module SCM 1 Strobe Controller 24 Volt Power Supply 003 406000 010 502702 010 502601 or 010 502602 Figure 2 36 shows the I O Terminal Block Adapter Sensor and Strobe Connections shown with a fiber optic sensor an SCM 1 strobe controller and a 24 volt power supply v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 2 37 Chapter Connecting to the HawkEye 1500 FIGURE 2 36 I O Terminal Block Adapter Sensor amp Strobe Connections Ji Sensor Cable 7 24 RIN D 2 l Sb HS 24 2 STROBE 2C OL c Strobe Cable 2 6 SENSEA Jumper Sensor To Strobe Light SM312 me xe d AS MP50 xxx Assy YV 24 Volt C Power Supply 966 0183 1 aN 030 008400 d 030 008800 7 J Hawkeye 1510 Terminal Block Adapter 5 1 Strobe Controller 24 Volt Power Supply 990 0056 1 010 502702 010 502601 or 010 502602 2 38 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008
274. ycle data structure This object has 2 DINTS The first byte of the first DINT represents the I O as listed in Table 1 The other bytes are currently ignored The second DINT is the user defined keyword This object supports implicit I O connectivity and the Get Attribute Single service ID OxOE or the Set Attribute Single service ID 0x10 for attribute ID 3 As with the DIO object above I O points that are programmed as physical inputs to the camera are represented in software For example if the s w detects a transition on Opto In 1 consistent with a trigger signal it will virtually trigger the acquisition e Assembly Object class code 4 instance 301 This object sends commands to the camera via Ethernet IP The object supports 260 bytes of data The first four is a DINT that contains the command length The remaining 256 bytes is the command string This object does not support implicit I O connectivity It supports the Get Attribute Single service ID 4 70 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner 0 0 or the Set Attribute Single service ID 0x10 for attribute ID 3 When the Set Attribute Single service is called the command is executed The command is executed asynchronously and there is no specific command handshake A detailed technote HawkEye 1500 Tech Note EIP Communicating with ControlLogix PLC pdf can be found on the Release CD This document provides information on how to set u
275. ye 1500 Series User Manual v2 4 1 Nov 2008 Using ReadRunner FIGURE 4 14 Photometry Window Auto Photometry 6 Auto Photometry Exp 1500 usec Gain 200 dB C Manual Photometry m Image Preprocessing Method X If you select Automatic Photometry the HawkEye 1500 camera determines lighting control at each trigger and prior to each image scan FIGURE 4 15 Photometry Window Manual Photometry fJhawkeyee000a0 CTRL Photometry C Auto Photometry Exp 1633 usec Gain 306 dB Manual Photometry Exposure 1633 1 Gain 306 NEUE GE NECI Image Preprocessing Method NONE m Negative Image i o c gt tc tc If you select Manual Photometry you must specify the following Exposure Move the slider left to decrease or right to increase the exposure Range 30 20000usec v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 4 23 Chapter ReadRunner Note Higher values for Exposure mean a longer image acquisition time and total cycle time Gain Move the slider left to decrease or right to increase the gain Range 0 1023dB Note When Verification is set to No Verification Gain and Exposure can be adjusted by AutoPhotometry or manually When Verification is set to AIM DPM 1 2006 Gain and Exposure will be locked to the user and can only be updated by the kernel Image preprocessin
276. ype that has a Minimum Cell Size less than 0 033 0 84mm and a field of view greater than 1 125 28 58mm is the Medium Density MD v2 4 1 Nov 2008 HawkEye 1500 Series User Manual 1 5 Chapter Configurations TABLE 1 1 Lens Selection Chart Type Medium Density MD Working Distance 5 0 127mm 1 0 25 4mm Field of View at Focus 1 55 H 39 37mm x 1 19 V 30 23mm Minimum Cell Size 4 Pixels Cell DM 0 010 0 25mm BC 0 005 0 127mm High Density HD 3 0 76 2mm 0 5 12 7mm 1 00 H 25 4mm x 0 75 V 19 05mm DM 0 006 0 152mm BC 0 003 0 076mm Long High Density LHD 5 0 127mm 0 5 12 7mm 1 00 H 25 4mm x 0 75 V DM 0 006 0 152mm BC 0 003 0 076mm 19 05mm Super High Density 3 5 88 9mm 0 55 H DM 0 003 0 076mm SHD 0 5 12 7mm 13 97mm x BC 0 0015 0 088mm 0 42 V 10 67mm Ultra High Density UHD 2 25 57 15mm 0 125 0 25 H 6 35mm x 0 19 V DM 0 0013 0 033 BC 0 0005 0 0127mm 3 175mm Custom Lens Selection 4 83mm In addition to the HawkEye 1515 and HawkEye 1525 cameras with built in lenses the HawkEye 1510 is sold with a C or CS mount that allows the use of conventional lenses The use of conventional lenses and extension tubes allow a much larger range of fields of view and working distances to be accomplished Standar

HawkEye 1500 Series User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents